251
Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc A thesis submitted in partial fulfilment of the requirements for the degree of Doctor of Philosophy Research Concentration in Electrical Energy School of Electrical and Electronic Systems Engineering Queensland University of Technology 2003

Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

  • Upload
    others

  • View
    2

  • Download
    0

Embed Size (px)

Citation preview

Page 1: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for

Power System Stability

Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

A thesis submitted in partial fulfilment of the requirements for the degree of

Doctor of Philosophy

Research Concentration in Electrical Energy

School of Electrical and Electronic Systems Engineering

Queensland University of Technology

2003

Page 2: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

Statement of Original Authorship

The work contained in this thesis has not been previously submitted for a

degree or diploma at any other higher education institution. To the best of

my knowledge and belief, the thesis contains no material previously

published or written by another except where due reference is made.

Signed:_____________________________

Date: ______________________________

Page 3: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

Acknowledgement List

I like to express my heartfelt gratitude to my principal supervisor, Professor

Gerard Ledwich for his valuable guidance and selfless supports during these

three years of my PhD research. His patience and unfailing encouragement

have been the major contributing factors in the completion of my PhD

research. Professor Ledwich’s constructive comments on our conference

papers and prospective journal paper have benefited me significantly. It has

been my greatest pleasure to expand my learning horizon during these three

years of PhD research under the guidance of Professor Gerard Ledwich.

Finally, I must say that I am fortunate to have Professor Gerard Ledwich as

my principal supervisor who has always been there for me.

I also like to thank my associate supervisor, Dr. Edward Palmer, for his

patience and encouragement during the course of the research. His

constructive comments on our conference paper and prospective journal

paper have benefited me significantly. Finally, I must say that I am fortunate

to have Dr. Palmer as my associate supervisor who has always been there

for me.

Finally, I like to thank my family for their support during my entire research

period that has enabled me to concentrate my work at QUT.

Page 4: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

Dedication

This work is dedicated to my two PhD supervisors, my late father, my

mother, my late elder sister, my brother, my younger sister, my wife and

son.

Page 5: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

List of Publications

1. T. W. Chan and G. Ledwich, "Multi-mode damping using single HVDC link," Australasian Universities Power Engineering Conference 2001, Perth, Australia, pp. 483-488, September 2001.

2. T. W. Chan, G. Ledwich, and E. W. Palmer, "Is velocity feedback

always best for machine stability control?," Australasian Universities Power Engineering Conference 2002, Melbourne, Australia, October 2002.

3. T. W. Chan, G. Ledwich, and E. W. Palmer, "Is velocity feedback

always best for machine stability control ?," Journal of Electrical & Electronics Engineering, Australia, Vo. 22, No. 3, pp. 195-202, 2002.

4. T. W. Chan, G. Ledwich, and E. W. Palmer, “Strengthening

Multimachine Synchronism," under review by the IEEE Transactions on Power System, 2003.

Page 6: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

i

Table of Contents

Abstract v

Keywords vii

List of Illustrations and Diagrams viii

List of Tables xiii

List of Abbreviations xiv

Table of Symbols xvi

Chapter 1. Introduction 1 1.1. Power System Oscillation 5 1.2. Small Signal Analysis 6

1.2.1. Eigenvalues Analysis 9 1.2.2. Participation Matrix P 12

1.3. Direct Method and Total Energy 13 1.4. Aim of the Research 17 1.5. References 18

Chapter 2. Existing Control Methods 21 2.1. Introduction 21 2.2. Energy Function and Unstable Equilibrium Point (UEP) 25

2.2.1. Closest UEP Method 27 2.2.2. UEP in the Direction of Fault Trajectory 28 2.2.3. Controlling UEP Method 29 2.2.4. PEBS based Controlling UEP Method 30 2.2.5. BCU Method 31 2.2.6. Mode of Disturbance Method 31 2.2.7. Critical Cluster Method 33 2.2.8. Cutset Energy Function 34

2.3. Methods of Stability Assessments 36 2.4. Evaluation of Transient Energy 39 2.5. Energy function based Switching Control 39 2.6. Control of DC link and TCSC 41

Page 7: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

ii

2.6.1. History of HVDC Link 42 2.6.2. Considerations in the Use of DC Link to Damp

Oscillations 43 2.6.3. Using Different Control Schemes to Supplement the

Control of Inverter 44 2.6.4. Discontinuous Control of Thyristor Control Series

Compensation (TCSC) 47 2.7. Wide Area Control 49

2.7.1. Centralized and Wide Area Control 50 2.8. Discussion 51 2.9. References 54

Chapter 3. Kinetic Energy Reduction for Power System Stability Design 59

3.1. Introduction 60 3.2. Energy Function Based Switching Control 62 3.3. Signum Function (Bang-bang Control) 68

3.3.1. A High Gain Feedback Control Problem 72 3.3.2. Reducing the Number of Mode by Switching

Control 75 3.3.3. Location of Zeros and Bang-bang Control 78

3.4. Exponential Convergence Introduced by a Saturation Function 79

3.5. Conclusion 83 3.6. References 87

Chapter 4. Weighted Energy Control 89 4.1. Introduction 90 4.2. Looking at a Two-area Energy Problems 91 4.3. A Proximity to Separation weighting Based on UEP 95 4.4. Conclusion 98 4.5. References 100 Chapter 5. Optimal Switching Near Separation 101 5.1. Introduction 102 5.2. A Velocity Proportional Control Based on Energy 104 5.3. Characterization of a First Swing Switching Stability

Problem 108

Page 8: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

iii

5.3.1. Recognizing a Partly Stable region (PS region) 109 5.4. Undesirable Effect of Saturation Function 112 5.5. An Angle Look-ahead Control 114

5.5.1. An Optimal Switching Line 118

5.6. An Optimal Look-ahead ∆T that Satisfy Minimum Time Criteria 121

5.7. Conclusion 125 5.8. References 127 Chapter 6. Towards improving the Transfer Capacity 129 6.1. Introduction 130 6.2. Total Energy Decomposition – Cutset Energy 132

6.2.1. General Algebraic Expression for Cutsets Kinetic Energy 138

6.2.2. Decomposition of Total Potential Energy 140 6.3. Weighting of Cutset Energy 144 6.4. Detection of Proximity to Angle Separation Based on the

Boundary of Partly Stable Regions 146 6.5. A Cutset Based Energy Control that Enhances the

Survival of Power System 147 6.5.1. Derivative of Cutset Kinetic Energy 147 6.5.2. Cutset Angle Look-ahead Dependant Terms 148 6.5.3. A Cutset Energy Based Control 150

6.6. Case study 1 (Classical Three-machine 9-bus System) 152 6.6.1. Total Kinetic Energy Reduction Control 153 6.6.2. Determining Feasible Cutsets and Its Corresponding

UEPs 156 6.6.3. Determining the Cutset Energy Equation 159 6.6.4. Determining the Proximity to Separation Prediction 160 6.6.5. Determining the Cutset Energy Reduction Control 165 6.6.6. Results 166

6.6.6.1. Energy Evaluated at an Unstable Local Minimum (ULM) is not Critical Energy 167

6.6.6.2. The Uncertainty in the Type of Power System Separation in a Multiple UEPs Operating Condition 172

6.6.6.3. The Ease of Using Cutset Energy to Predict a Potential Separation 177

6.6.6.4. The Value of using Cutset energy Control 179 6.7. Case Study 2 (Detailed Six-machine 21-bus System) 186 6.8. Implementation Issues 198

Page 9: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

iv

6.8.1. Response Time of SVC and Time Delay in Data Transmission 198

6.8.2. GPS Jitter 200 6.8.3. Measurement Noise 200 6.8.4. Multidimensional Issue of Cutsets 201 6.8.5. Summary of Implementation Issues 204

6.9. Conclusion 206 6.10. References 209 Chapter 7. Conclusion and Recommendation 211 7.1. Conclusion 211 7.2. Recommendations 217 7.3. References 224

Page 10: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

v

Abstract

The issue of angle instability has been widely discussed in the power

engineering literature. Many control techniques have been proposed to

provide the complementary synchronizing and damping torques through

generators and/or network connected power apparatus such as FACTs,

braking resistors and DC links. The synchronizing torque component keeps

all generators in synchronism while damping torque reduces oscillations and

returns the power system to its pre-fault operating condition. One of the

main factors limiting the transfer capacity of the electrical transmission

network is the separation of the power system at weak links which can be

understood by analogy with a large spring-mass system. However, this

weak-links related problem is not dealt with in existing control designs

because it is non-trivial during transient period to determine credible weak

links in a large power system which may consist of hundreds of strong and

weak links. The difficulty of identifying weak links has limited the

performance of existing controls when it comes to the synchronization of

generators and damping of oscillations. Such circumstances also restrict the

operation of power systems close to its transient stability limits. These

considerations have led to the primary research question in this thesis, “To

what extent can the synchronization of generators and damping of

oscillations be maximized to fully extend the transient stability limits of

power systems and to improve the transfer capacity of the network?” With

the recent advances in power electronics technology, the extension of

Page 11: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

vi

transfer capacity is becoming more readily achievable. Complementary to

the use of power electronics technology to improve transfer capacity, this

research develops an improved control strategy by examining the dynamics

of the modes of separation associated with the strong and weak links of the

reduced transmission network. The theoretical framework of the control

strategy is based on Energy Decomposition and Unstable Equilibrium

Points. This thesis recognizes that under extreme loadings of the

transmission network containing strong and weak links, weak-links are most

likely to dictate the transient stability limits of the power system. We

conclude that in order to fully extend the transient stability limits of power

system while maximizing the value of control resources, it is crucial for the

control strategy to aim its control effort at the energy component that is

most likely to cause a separation. The improvement in the synchronization

amongst generators remains the most important step in the improvement of

the transfer capacity of the power system network.

Page 12: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

vii

Keywords

Lyapunov, power system, stability, switching, energy function-based

control, bang-bang control, saturation function, energy in phase portrait,

partly stable region, energy weighting, cutset, energy decomposition, cutset

energy, proximity-to-critical cutset energy, proximity-to-partly stable

region, cutset energy-based control, quantified transient stability limits and

transfer capacity.

Page 13: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

viii

List of Illustrations and Diagram

Figure 2.1: A back-to-back DC link interconnecting two AC power

systems. -------------------------------------------------------- 45

Figure 3.1: Single line diagram of a four-machine two-area power

system. --------------------------------------------------------- 62

Figure 3.2: The response of machine speeds. Due to the bang-bang

control, continuous oscillations are formed. -------------- 69

Figure 3.3: The system response is kept on a switching hyperplane

S beyond 3.5 seconds effectively resulting in zero

control. --------------------------------------------------------- 69

Figure 3.4: The remaining total kinetic energy in the power system

results in continuous oscillations. -------------------------- 71

Figure 3.5: A general negative feedback transfer function block. -- 73

Figure 3.6: A Root Locus diagram showing a non-divergent control

effect. ----------------------------------------------------------- 74

Figure 3.7: A dual LC circuit with a control voltage V. --------------- 76

Figure 3.8: Under a bang-bang control, the capacitor voltages of

dual LC circuit have one remaining mode undamped. -- 78

Figure 3.9: The machine speeds converge owing to the soft

switching in linear region. ----------------------------------- 81

Figure 3.10: The system responses decay exponentially near an

origin as the continuous control in the linear region

dominates. ----------------------------------------------------- 82

Figure 3.11: The total kinetic energy converges exponentially

towards an origin reaching the system solution. --------- 82

Figure 3.12: The energy based control that uses the saturation

function control law. ----------------------------------------- 83

Figure 4.1: Single line diagram of a four-machine two-area system. 91

Page 14: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

ix

Figure 4.2: Control effort directed to save area 2 from separation

around 0.25s. -------------------------------------------------- 97

Figure 4.3: Weightings of the two areas that indicated the high risk

separation in the area. ---------------------------------------- 98

Figure 5.1: Two-machine system with breaking resistor at bus 3. --- 105

Figure 5.2: Control chatters and angle hovers at maximum as the

forced damping is effectively zero. Faults at bus 4 are

cleared at 1.0459 seconds. ----------------------------------- 109

Figure 5.3: Effects of δ& bang-bang control switching in the PS

region causing control chattering. Fault cleared at

1.0459 seconds. ----------------------------------------------- 110

Figure 5.4: A close-up view of the partly stable region showing two

sets of trajectories directing towards the 0=δ&

switching line. ------------------------------------------------ 111

Figure 5.5: Undesirable effect of using a δ& saturation function at

first swing when the severe faults at bus 4 are cleared at

1.067 seconds. ------------------------------------------------ 113

Figure 5.6: The use of switching line ST in the δ& bang-bang control

avoids the chattering of control. ---------------------------- 117

Figure 5.7: Understanding a divider line at a reduced UEP. ---------- 119

Figure 5.8: Understanding an optimal slope. --------------------------- 119

Figure 5.9: Illustration of the approximated switching line and the

total switching line ST. --------------------------------------- 121

Figure 5.10: Delayed switching performance using ∆T=1.2

(dashed) and ∆T=1.7 (solid). -------------------------------- 123

Figure 5.11: Insignificant settling time between the two examples

of switching at different instances. ------------------------- 125

Figure 6.1: A three-machine 6-bus system is used to illustrate the

possible separations. ----------------------------------------- 132

Figure 6.2: A three-machine 9-bus system with a controllable SVC

installed at bus 5. --------------------------------------------- 153

Page 15: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

x

Figure 6.3: Unstable system trajectory on a total potential energy

surface. The fault at bus 7 is cleared at 233ms. Under

no SVC control, power system separates at the UEP 2

associated with the cutset (23/1). --------------------------- 167

Figure 6.4: Relative angles show the power system separation

between generator 1 and the rest of the system. The

fault at bus 7 is cleared at 233ms. -------------------------- 168

Figure 6.5: Generator angles are separating when the fault at bus 7

is cleared at 300ms. Cutset (1/23) or (23/1) is

confirmed as the only separation possible for the power

system. --------------------------------------------------------- 170

Figure 6.6: Unstable system trajectory on a total potential energy

surface. The fault at bus 9 is cleared at 300ms. Under

no SVC control, power system separates at the UEP 2

associated with the cutset (23/1). --------------------------- 171

Figure 6.7: Unstable system trajectory on a total potential energy

surface. The fault at bus 7 is cleared at 400ms. Under

no SVC control, power system separates at the UEP 2

associated with the cutset (23/1). --------------------------- 173

Figure 6.8: Separation of generator 3 from the rest of the system

associates with cutset (3/12). The fault at bus 9 is

cleared at 463ms. --------------------------------------------- 175

Figure 6.9: System trajectory on potential energy surface. The fault

at bus 9 is cleared 381ms and an unexpected separation

associated with cutset (2/13) occurs. ----------------------- 176

Figure 6.10: The total energy diagram shows the difficulty of

determining when the power system has separated. The

fault at bus 9 is cleared at 381ms. -------------------------- 177

Figure 6.11: Cutset energy responsible for the various types of

separations. The fault at bus 9 is cleared at 381ms. The

power system separates at the UEP 2. --------------------- 178

Page 16: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

xi

Figure 6.12: Generator 2 has separated from the rest of the system

at around 1.2s which is predicted by the “cutset energy

2”associated with cutset (2/13). ---------------------------- 179

Figure 6.13: The system trajectory that is controlled using Uen

(dashed) and U# (solid line with dots) are shown on the

potential energy surface. The fault at bus 9 is cleared at

390ms. --------------------------------------------------------- 181

Figure 6.14: The response of machine angles under the influence of

the Uen (dotted) and U# (solid) controls. The fault at bus

9 is cleared at 390.4ms. -------------------------------------- 182

Figure 6.15: The switching of control values due to the Uen (dotted)

and U# (solid) controls. -------------------------------------- 183

Figure 6.16: Cutset energy of the power system under the influence

of the energy control Uen. The fault at bus 9 is cleared

at 390.4ms. ---------------------------------------------------- 184

Figure 6.17: Cutset energy of the power system under the influence

of the cutset energy control U#. The fault at bus 9 is

cleared 390.4ms. ---------------------------------------------- 185

Figure 6.18: A six-machine 21-bus test system with the Left side of

the generations far from the Central and Right areas. --- 187

Figure 6.19: SVC control using local measurements of power and

voltage to approximate a velocity and positional

feedback. --------- 189

Figure 6.20: COA angle difference for the Central-Right area

(dotted lines) and the Central-Left area (solid lines)

under the influence of different SVC controls. Line

trips at 150ms for the fault at bus 12. ---------------------- 190

Figure 6.21: COA angle difference for the Central-Right area

(dotted lines) and the Central-Left area (solid lines)

under the influence of different SVC controls. Line

trips at 200ms for the fault at bus 12. ---------------------- 192

Page 17: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

xii

Figure 6.22: Responses of SVC controls at bus 18 and 13. Line

trips at 204ms. SVC installed at bus 18 and 13 respond

to the inter-area mode associated with the Central-Left

area (solid line) and the Central-Right area (dotted line)

respectively. --------------------------------------------------- 193

Figure 6.23: Quantifying the transient stability limits of the power

system under different SVC controls. Fault is removed

by tripping one of the faulty parallel lines between bus

12 and 13. P18-19 refers to the steady state power flow. 195

Figure 6.24: Wrong selection of K2 in the voltage error control loop

leads to the separation at central-Left areas (dotted).

Line tripped at 199ms. --------------------------------------- 197

Figure 6.25: A comparison between the damping performance of

(mode) and (cutset) controls. Line trips at 199ms. ------- 198

Figure 6.24: Ten-machine 39-bus New England system. ------------- 204

Page 18: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

xiii

List of Tables

Table 6.1: The relationship between the unstable operating points

and cutsets. ---------------------------------------------------- 158

Table 6.2: The reduced unstable operating points of the power

system in Figure 6.2. ----------------------------------------- 163

Table 6.3: System data of Figure 6.2 modeified to reduced the

loading of lines between bus 5 & 7 and bus 6 & 9. This

modified loading yielded six UEPs. ----------------------- 172

Table 6.4: The relationship between the Unstable Equilibrium

Points (UEPs) and cutsets. ---------------------------------- 172

Page 19: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

xiv

List of Abbreviations

AC: Alternating Current

ACC: Acceleration

AC/DC: Alternating Current and Direct Current

BCU: Boundary of stability based Controlling Unstable equilibrium

point

COA: Centra-Of-Area

DC: Direct Current

DFP: Davidon-Fletcher-Powell

DSA: Dynamic Security Assessment

EHV: Extra High Voltage

EOP: Equilibrium Operating Point

FACT: Flexible AC Transmission system

GPS: Global Positioning System

HVDC: High Voltage Direct Current

KE: Kinetic Energy

LC: Inductor and Capacitor

LQR: Linear Quadratic Regulator

MOD: Mode of Disturbance

NR: Newton Ralphson

PEBS: Potential Energy Boundary Surface

PS: Partly Stable

PSS: Power System Stabilizer

SCS: Series Capacitor Compensation

SCR: Short-circuit ratio

SEP: Stable Equilibrium operating Point

SMIB: Single Machine Infinite Bus

SVC: Static VAR Compensator

TCSC: Thyristor Controlled Series Compensation

Page 20: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

xv

TNSP: Transmission Network Service Provider

UEP: Unstable Equilibrium Point

ULM: Unstable Local Minima

MPC: Model Predictive Control

Page 21: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

xvi

Table of Symbols

Symbol Meaning

x State variables

xo The initial conditions of the state variables

y Output variables

yo The initial conditions of the output variables

u The input variables. In the switching perspective, it

represents a switching input

uo The initial conditions of the input variables

∆x The small perturbations of state variables

∆y The small changes in the output variables

∆u The small perturbations of input variables

x& The derivatives of state variables

ox& The initial conditions of the derivatives of state variables

f(.) An objective function f

g(.) An objective function g

i

i

xf

∂∂

Derivative of the ith function fi with respect to the ith variable

xi

i

i

xg

∂∂

Derivative of the ith function gi with respect to the ith variable

xi

[.] A matrix of variables or a column vector or a row vector

A An nxn system matrix

B An nxn input matrix

C An mxn output matrix

D An mxn feed forward matrix

v Left eigenvector

Page 22: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

xvii

V Matrix containing rows of left eigenvectors

w Right eigenvector

W Matrix containing columns of right eigenvector

λ Eigenvalue

x∆ Vector of state variables transformed by V from its original

base to eigenvector base

Λ A matrix containing eigenvalues in its diagonal entries and

zeros in its off-diagonal entries

P Participation matrix

V A Lyapunov function. In energy perspective, it is also used to

represent total energy

V& A Lyapunov function

∑=

n

iix

1 Summation of the variable x from its ith to nth elements

mi Inertial constant of ith machine

δi The ith machine angle

δij The angle difference between the ith and jth generator angle

siδ The ith machine angle at an equilibrium point

uiδ The ith machine angle at an equilibrium point

ωi, iδ& Angular velocity of the ith machine angle δi

ωo Angular velocity of the network reference frame

iδ&& Angular acceleration of the ith machine angle δi

Pmi Mechanical power of the ith machine

vi Voltage at the ith bus

Bij The admittance of the transmission line between the ith and jth

buses

∆VP.E. Small change in potential energy

UEPV .. Potential energy evaluated at an unstable equilibrium point

clEPV .. Potential energy evaluated at fault clearing

VK.E.|corr Corrected transient kinetic energy

Page 23: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

xviii

Meq Equivalent inertial constant of a group of machine

Mcr Sum of all machine inertial constant in a critical machine

group

Msys Sum of all machine inertial constant in a system machine

group

syscr ωω ~,~ Centre of area angular velocity of a critical machine group

and a system machine group respectively

η(δc) Extended equal area criterion’s stability margin at critical

angle

Adec(δc) Extended equal area criterion’s deceleration area between

critical angle δc and angle at a stable equilibrium point δs

Aacc(δc) Extended equal area criterion’s acceleration area between

critical angle δc and angle at a stable equilibrium point δs okσ Inter-nodal angle at a stable equilibrium point of the kth line

lkµ Vulnerability coefficient of the kth line evaluated between o

and (π- okσ )

ukµ Vulnerability coefficient of the kth line evaluated between o

and (-π- okσ )

−+ii υυ , Vulnerability indices of the ith line

U Vector of switching control input

∆ijα Changes in line reactance between the ith and jth buses due to

control Uα

maxc

minc X,X The minimum and maximum series compensating

capacitance

scX The steady state series compensating capacitance

Y Reduced admittance matrix of a power system network

Yout Reduced admittance matrix Y without controller

Yin Reduced admittance matrix Y with controller

Page 24: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

xix

Yactual Reduced admittance matrix Y taking into consideration the

switching operation

∆Y Changes in the reduced admittance matrix Y

gij Shunt conductance at the ith row and jth column of Y

bij Transfer admittance at the ith row and jth column of Y

∆gij Changes in the shunt conductance at the ith row and jth

column of Y

∆bij Changes in the Transfer admittance at the ith row and jth

column of Y

Pdci Power transfer across a DC link at the ith area

Pcoai Centre of area power or perfect governor term in the ith area

Pei Electrical power output of the ith generator

G2 Shunt resistor

ii θδ ,~

The ith machine angle measured in the centre of area frame

θij The angle difference between the ith and jth buses measured in

the centre of area frame

δcoa Angle for the centre of area

icoaδ Angle for the centre of area of the ith area

sgn(.) Signum function or bang-bang control function

sat(.) Saturation function

t time

S Switching surface

Vkei Kinetic energy of the ith generator

Vpe Total potential energy

K Gain

z(s) Feedback signal of a negative feedback control loop.

ϕi Angle of departure in Root Locus analysis

αz Angle from the closed loop pole of interest to all of the finite

zero

Page 25: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

xx

αp Angle from the closed loop pole of interest to the rest of the

poles

wt Weighting

SV Switching surface derived from the derivative of kinetic

energy

γ A scalar multiplier for angle look-ahead control

∆T Angle look-ahead duration

SP Switching surface derived from angle look-ahead control

ST Total switching surface

(i/jk) #gA The ith group of generators that separates from the rest of the

power system that contain the jth and kth groups of generators.

The subscript ‘#’ distinguishes the commonly used notation

(i/jk) as the cutset, g refers to the gth cutset in the set A of the

list of possible cutset and A is the Ath set of cutsets where the

ith generator group is the critical group of generators that

tends to separate from the rest of the system.

ηi The product of the ith generator’s angular velocity and square

root of ith generator’s inertial constant

ijp The square of the sum of ηi and ηj

ijn The square of the difference of ηi and ηj

Vke#i The ith cutset kinetic energy

µ The total number of separations

sυ The vector of indices of the generators separating from the

rest of the system

rυ The vector of indices of the remaining generators that do not

appear in vector sυ .

ns The total number of generators in vector sυ

nr The total number of generators in vector rυ

Ω The kinetic energy decomposition scaling coefficient

β The total number of the types of separation including the

cutset (ijk)

Page 26: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

xxi

njC Combinatory notation of choosing j elements from n

elements

Fυ A vector evaluated to eliminate the repeating types of

separation

trunc(.) truncating function that rounds a positive non-integer to the

nearest integer towards zero

ijl The energy stored in the lines interconnecting the ith and jth

generators

τ The decomposition scaling coefficient for the energy stored

in transmission lines

σi Square root of the shaft energy of ith generator

ijs+ The square of the sum of σi and σj

ijs- The square of the difference of σi and σj

λ The decomposition scaling coefficient of the shaft energy

sisn )(δ Stable equilibrium angle of the ith generator selected from the

vector ns

wt#i Weighting of the ith cutset

εi Proximity to critical cutset energy coefficient

Vpe#i The ith cutset potential energy cri

ipeV # The critical ith cutset potential energy

)(#

lineipeV The energy stored in lines associated with the ith cutset

)(#

shaftipeV The shaft energy associated with the ith cutset

Vke#i The ith cutset kinetic energy

Vt#i The ith cutset energy evaluated from the sum of Vke#i and Vpe#i

Proxuep#i The closeness to angle separation index evaluated at ith cutset

unstable equilibrium point

[θsys] Angle vector of the system trajectory

Page 27: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

xxii

ruep

i#θ Angle vector of the ith cutset’s unstable equilibrium point

reduced due to switching operation

SV# Switching surface derived from the derivative of cutset

kinetic energy

SP# Switching surface derived from the cutset based angle look-

ahead control

S# Weighted switching surface of the sum of SV# and SP#

wuepijθ The angle difference between the ith and jth generators

operating at unstable equilibrium point associated with the

wth cutset

U# Vector of switching control input derived from the sum of SV

and S# under the condition of the saturation function

Uen vector of switching control input derived from the sum of SV

under the condition of the saturation function

δij/kh Angle difference between δij and δkh

∠ Bus angle

E Generator terminal voltage

Texc Exciter time constant

J Performance index

Q Weighting matrix for the minimization of performance index

R Weighting matrix for the control values used in the

minimization of performance index

xT The superscript T refers to the transpose of a matrix or vector

Page 28: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

1

Chapter 1

Introduction

A power system is one of the most complex systems ever built, consisting of

hundreds of generators, protection switches and thousands of kilometers of

transmission lines. It is constructed to generate and deliver electricity to

serve the needs of mankind. When operating this power system, one would

encounter certain power system dynamics such as electromagnetic changes

in electric machines, electromechanical dynamics between rotating masses

and the thermodynamic changes of boilers [1]. These dynamics could occur

in various overlapping time frames from microseconds to hours.

One example of a large modern power system formed by interconnecting

the power systems of various states is the South-Eastern Australian power

network made up of the power systems of Queensland, New South Wales,

Victoria and South Australia. Although this interconnection to create a large

longitudinal power system may experience complicated electromechanical

dynamics amongst its generators giving rise to potential power system

separations at its weak interconnecting links, it offers attractive advantages.

Page 29: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

2

For instance, one of the states can maintain a reliable operation of its power

system while saving a large amount of spinning reserves when it is

interconnected to this ‘large power system’. Another advantage is the

economic benefit for all these states in terms of lower electricity prices as a

result of the interstate generation competition and reduced capital

investment in controllers. However, before these states can enjoy the full

benefits of an interconnected power system, the entire power system must

have the abilities to withstand (survive) severe disturbances and allow high

power transfers between regions. To achieve these abilities, an appropriate

control that synchronizes electric machines during transient at post-fault is

necessary. It is understood from the excitation control and power system

stabilizer (PSS) control loops [2, Page 254-277] that in small signal

analysis, voltage feedback to the excitation system is a crucial feedback

control that tends to improve transient stability by increasing the

synchronizing torques in the power system. The PSS control is introduced to

increase the damping torques in the power system to damp the subsequent

oscillations. This means there can be a conflict between synchronizing and

damping torques.

In this chapter, the fundamentals of small signal analysis, in particular

eigenvalues analysis and participation factors are introduced. Its benefits

and limitations will also be discussed. We also introduce the Lyapunov’s

direct method as a promising non-linear analysis tool that can be used to

overcome the restrictions found in small signal analysis, particularly, when

Page 30: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

3

the consequences of severe disturbances are being considered. The benefit

of using the direct method to predict transient stability at post-fault without

the need to perform a lengthy time domain simulation during the post-fault

period is discussed.

In Chapter 2, literature review associated with energy function based control

is described. In particular, the literature review focuses on stability

prediction methods associated with Unstable Equilibrium point (UEP). The

literature review is also extended to understand the problems associated

with the control of DC link and the control of Thyristor Controlled Series

Compensator (TCSC) associated with the damping of multiple (n-1) modes.

The literature review in wide area control in association centralized and

decentralized control aids in the reorganization of the benefits of remote

measurement for control.

Chapter 3 describes the energy function based switching control. The

problem of using this high gain velocity feedback control (or a velocity

based bang-bang control) near an equilibrium operating point is discussed.

Chapter 4 describes the problem of energy function based switching control

associated with the operation of power system in which some areas are

strongly (or closely) linked while some areas are weakly (or distantly)

linked. This is referred to as the strong and weak links in this thesis. We will

discuss on how Unstable Equilibrium Points (UEPs) can be associated with

Page 31: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

4

these strong and weak links and how UEP associated weightings can be

used in energy function based switching control to direct control efforts to

the weak area. The benefits of giving the weak area a higher control priority

in terms of saving a power system from angle instability are also discussed.

Chapter 5 describes the problem associated with switching near an Unstable

Equilibrium Point (UEP). The undesirable effects of machine angle

hovering near a UEP and the effect of proposing phase shift in association

with the robustness constraint in control implementation is discussed.

Chapter 6 describes the decomposition of total energy that characterizes the

different types of power system separations. These different types of power

system separations are defined as the different modes of separation in this

thesis. This chapter extends the controls proposed in the earlier chapters

using the Energy Decomposition technique to maximize the transient

stability limits of a multi-machine power system. The process of how a

switching control based on Energy Decomposed can be used to extend the

transient stability limits and improve the transfer capacity of the electrical

transmission network is discussed.

Page 32: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

5

1.1. Power System Oscillation

In a power system, electricity is generated from rotating machines, known

as synchronous machines. The key feature of the power system operation is

that the generators at every power station must run in synchronism with

each other. This permits efficient transfer of power between generators and

loads. As energy can not be stored in the network for the late subsequent use

by loads, the total power generated must balance the consumption of power

by loads. Power flow from a generator depends on the angle of its rotor

compared with angle of other generators hence the power flow along

transmission lines is largely controlled by the angle between the voltages on

the two ends of the line. For instance, the transfer of power from bus A to B

along a transmission line is only possible when the angle of the voltage at

bus A is higher than the angle of the voltage at bus B. When there are small

disturbances in the power system network such as the changes in loads,

these cause an imbalance between the total power generated by synchronous

machines and the total power to be consumed by loads. In such case, each

synchronous machine is automatically controlled to adjust its generated

power to achieve the required power balance in the network. The generated

power at each synchronous machine relies on the control of its governor. As

the control of governor does not give rise to an instantaneous change in the

output power of the synchronous machine, this give rise to oscillating power

output amongst these synchronous machines in the power system. These

oscillations amongst synchronous machines are termed electromechanical

Page 33: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

6

oscillations. Under the influence of the damper winding in each

synchronous machine, small oscillations caused by small changes in loads

can be sufficiently damped. When severe disturbances such as the outage of

lines occur, high magnitude oscillations may be noticeable, and the use of

controlled devices such as an exciter, power system stabilizer or FACTs can

be used to damp these oscillations. Generally, electromechanical oscillations

are classified into local mode and inter-area mode oscillations. Local mode

oscillation is commonly associated with an oscillating frequency range of

0.8 to 2.5Hz whereas inter-area oscillations are associated with 0.1 to 0.7Hz.

In general, inter-area oscillations are more poorly damped than local

oscillations. The focus of this study is to develop a control methodology that

is applicable to the control of these oscillations.

1.2. Small Signal Analysis

Small signal analysis [3, Page 18-23] can be applied to the study of the

nonlinear power system dynamics around an equilibrium operating point. At

an equilibrium operating point, a power system is subject to relatively small

disturbances such that the nonlinear power system dynamics, represented in

its fundamental form as a set of swing equations [1, Page 141-144], can be

linearized to approximate the non-linearity in the power system.

Equilibrium operating points are usually obtained from load flow analysis

[3, 4]. For the purpose of this study, boiler dynamics and governor dynamics

Page 34: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

7

are not considered as they are largely outside the range of frequency being

examined.

The set of swing equations that describes the dynamic of a power system is

basically a set of first order differential equations, which are not an explicit

function of time [1, 3, 5]. Its state derivative dtdx

and output y represented in

a compact form is

),(),(

uxgyuxfx

==&

(1.1)

where x and u are the vectors of state variables and system inputs

respectively.

Under small perturbations, (1.1) becomes

yyuuxxgyxxuuxxfx

ooo

ooo

∆+=∆+∆+=∆+=∆+∆+=

),(),( &&&

(1.2)

where xo, yo and uo are the vectors of the initial conditions of states, outputs

and inputs at an equilibrium operating point respectively. The notations ∆x,

∆y and ∆u refers to the vectors of the small perturbations of states, outputs

and inputs around the equilibrium operating point respectively.

Expanding (1.2) by Taylor series and neglecting the second order

derivatives, an ith state derivative is

Page 35: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

8

nn

iin

n

iiooii

nn

iin

n

iiooii

uug

uug

xxg

xxg

uxgy

uuf

uuf

xxf

xxf

uxfx

∆∂∂

++∆∂∂

+∆∂∂

++∆∂∂

+=

∆∂∂

++∆∂∂

+∆∂∂

++∆∂∂

+=

....),(

....),(

11

11

11

11

&

(1.3)

At an equilibrium operating point where the sum of all electrical power

generated meets the sum of all demands and losses in the transmission

network, machine accelerations are zero. This leads to 0=ox& . The compact

form of (1.3) is

uDxCyuBxAx

∆+∆=∆∆+∆=∆&

(1.4)

where

∂∂

∂∂

∂∂

∂∂

=

∂∂

∂∂

∂∂

∂∂

=

n

nn

n

n

nn

n

uf

uf

uf

uf

B

xf

xf

xf

xf

A

...

.........

...

,

...

.........

...

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

∂∂

∂∂

∂∂

∂∂

=

∂∂

∂∂

∂∂

∂∂

=

n

mm

n

n

mm

n

ug

ug

ug

ug

D

xg

xg

xg

xg

C

...

.........

...

,

...

.........

...

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

Matrix A is a nxn state matrix, matrix B is a nxn input matrix, matrix C is a

mxn output matrix, matrix D is a mxn feed forward matrix, ∆x is the vector

of state variables perturbed at an equilibrium operating point and ∆u is the

input vector of input states perturbed at an equilibrium operating point.

The above process of linearizing the swing equation is described in [5, Page

209-219] and is applicable to detailed machine models that describe the

Page 36: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

9

dynamics of stator transient and the flux linkages between stator and rotor

circuits. Treatment of the linearized detailed machine model and the

electrical torques expressed in flux linkages terms are found in [3, 5-7]. The

machine-network interface equations that interfaces between the set of first

order differential equations describing machine dynamics and the set of

algebraic equations describing the power balance in the transmission

network are elaborated in [5].

One advantage of linearizing a set of non-linear power system equations

represented by a fundamental set of swing equations or detailed machine

model, is the availability of linear analysis tools such as the eigenvalues

analysis [3], the eigenvalues sensitivity analysis based on participation

factor [8], the residue method [9] and pole-zero analysis [10]. These

analysis tools determine system stability around an equilibrium operating

point. In control design, for example, the residue method and the poles-

zeros movement analysis are used to tune Power System Stabilizers (PSS) in

[9] and [10] respectively.

1.2.1. Eigenvalue Analysis

One of the most effective linear analysis tools is eigenvalue analysis. In

eigenvalue analysis, each of the system eigenvalues obtained from the

determinant 0Idet =− λA describes a mode of oscillation such as the local

Page 37: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

10

mode, inter-area mode, control mode or torsional mode [3]. Amongst these

modes, the control mode is usually well damped [11] and the torsional mode

is usually excited by a poorly designed series compensation control [12].

The electromechanical oscillations of the power system are mainly

associated with the local and inter-area modes and it is common that local

modes are oscillating in a frequency range of 0.8 to 2.5 Hz while the inter-

area modes are in the frequency range of 0.1 to 0.7 Hz [13].

Although eigenvalues are easily obtained from a system matrix A (1.4), the

relation between states and modes are not easily observable as these state

equations in (1.4) are interdependent. In order to overcome this problem,

state equations can be decoupled using eigenvectors [3].

Considering the state space form of a linearized dynamical system

xAx ∆=∆& , matrix V is chosen as an operator that transforms a vector of

state variables ∆x from its original base to an eigenvector base represented

as x∆

xWx

orxx

1

V

−=∆

∆= (1.5)

Matrix V is orthogonal to matrix W that contain columns of system

eigenvectors. Each row vector in matrix V is referred to as a left eigenvector

and each column vector in matrix W is referred to as a right eigenvector.

Eigenvectors v and w are normalised to 1

Page 38: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

11

1i

i

v

1v

0v

−=

=

=

w

w

w

iT

iT

(1.6)

Transforming the dynamical system xAx ∆=∆& , the new set of system

equations with eigenvector as a base is

( )( ) xAW

xAx∆=

∆=∆ −

VVV 1&

(1.7)

Referring to (1.7), matrix A is transformed by matrix V and W to a matrix

that contains system eigenvalues [3] in its diagonal entries

==

n

AW?000...000?

?1

V (1.8)

Looking at (1.4) and (1.8), it is clear that every state equation x&∆ has been

decoupled and each state variable ix∆ is directly related to a mode λ .

Eigenvectors v and w are defined in [3, 14]. Considering an ith column of the

right eigenvector wi, its kth element measures the activity of the state variable

kx∆ in the ith mode whereas for an ith row of the left eigenvector vi, its kth

element weighs the contribution of this activity to the ith mode.

Page 39: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

12

1.2.2. Participation Matrix P

While it is easy to study the relation between states and modes by observing

the right and left eigenvectors independently, there are problems associated

with the units and scale of state variables [3]. The participation matrix P is

proposed in [3, 8] to overcome this dimension problem based on the product

of the left and right eigenvectors. For each element of Pki, the kth row is

associated with the kth state variable and the ith column is associated with the

ith mode

variablesstateofrowskth

pppp

pppppppppppp

modesofcolumnsith

P

nnnnn

n

n

n

..................

...

...

...

321

3333231

2232221

1131211

44444 844444 76

= (1.9)

In the P matrix (1.9), the influence of state variables on the ith mode is

considered by observing the weighted values of an ith column whereas the

contribution of a kth state to various modes is observed from the kth row;

[Pki].

We have thus far described some of the most useful linear analysis tools to

predict the dynamical stability of a power system around an equilibrium

operating point. When severe disturbances occur in a power system and

result in a large change in machine states, it is erroneous to use a set of

Page 40: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

13

linearized power system equations to approximate the set of non-linear

power system equations. However, it is common for TNSP companies to

perform numerous small signal analyses based on several equilibrium

operating points in the hope of providing an extensive coverage of small

signal stability analysis [15].

1.3. Direct Method and Total Energy

In this section, the Lyapunov’s direct method and energy function are

explained. The benefits of using these non-linear analyses in the prediction

of transient stability are described.

In a large interconnected power system consisting of thousands of

generators, TNSP companies are facing problems [15] such as the

substantially long time involved in observing and predicting the result of

angle instability in a numerical simulation while examining a set of

contingencies, and the number of credible contingencies that needs to be

selected from a long list of possible contingencies for transient stability

study. This arises because during the actual operating conditions, the

behaviour of power system may change and result in a different set of

unexpected contingencies compared to the set of contingencies that is

examined during an off-line transient stability study. Although small signal

analysis based on linearized power system equations is capable of

determining system small signal stability, it is time consuming as several

Page 41: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

14

equilibrium operating points associated with a contingency must be

considered, and the selection of equilibrium operating point is solely based

on the experience in operating the power system.

The above inconveniences found in transient stability study using the time

domain simulation and small signal analysis make Lyapunov’s direct

method more suitable for the transient stability analysis. This is mainly due

to the fact that the stability criterion of the direct method is capable of

predicting the stability of power system at post-fault without performing

time consuming simulations.

The Lyapunov’s direct method applied on a nonlinear system of )(xfx =&

requires a Lyapunov function V [16, Page 23-24] that satisfies the properties

in (1.10) to determine if a dynamical system will remain stable along its

post-fault trajectory without going through a simulation of the post-fault

period.

)( ,0)(

,0)(

0)(

xfxoftrajectorythealongxV

xxforxV

xVs

s

=<

≠>

=

&& (1.10)

where xs is the system states at an equilibrium operating point. The stability

criterion requires that if (1.10) is satisfied then x will be asymptotically

stable as time t progresses.

Page 42: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

15

For a simple second order system, a Lyapunov function V is based on the

total energy of the nonlinear system and if V is found to be positive definite

for all x and 0<V& , the system will be globally stable.

For a power system, a candidate Lyapunov function V based on the total

energy neglecting the energy dissipated in lines is

( ) ( )∑ ∑ −−−−∑== +==

n

i

n

ij

sijijijji

siimi

n

iii BvvPmV

1 11

2 )cos()cos(21

δδδδω (1.11)

where ( )jiij δδδ −= , ( )sj

si

sij δδδ −= , Pmi is the mechanical power output

of electric machines, mi is the machine inertia constant, ωi is the machine

angular velocity and siδ is the machine angle at an equilibrium operating

point.

Examining (1.11), it is clear that the candidate Lyapunov function V is not

positive definite owing to the second and third terms (i.e. the potential

energy associated with the shaft energy and the energy stored in lines).

However, if the potential energy (i.e. the second and third terms of V) is

bounded within some angle limits forming a local region in angle space, this

results in a positive definite V. Relative to this local region, V becomes

positive semi-definite (i.e., 0≥V ). This local region is referred to as the

region of attraction [16, Page 49].

Page 43: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

16

As V is positive semi-definite and bounded within a local region in angle

space, and derivative V& is negative semi-definite (i.e. 0≤V& ) relative to this

local region

( )∑ ∑∑= +==

−−+−=n

i

n

ijjijiijjiimi

n

iiii BvvPmV

1 11))(sin( δδδδδωω &&&&& (1.12)

where all parameters have been defined earlier in association with equation

(1.11).

Based on the above mentioned stability criterions, the task of determining

the transient stability of a large power system is seemingly achievable as

long as the system trajectory is in the local region (or region of attraction) at

post-fault.

Considering the Lyapunov stability criteria of 0<V& , for asymptotic

stability. It is often difficult to satisfy this strict requirement in control

design such as in the energy function-based switching control design that

aims at achieving a most negative V& to force the convergence of system

trajectory. This gives rise to a relaxed Lyapunov criteria of 0≤V& . Consider

the system trajectory of an unforced system with no damping inside the

region of attraction at post-fault, this system trajectory will not be unstable

but oscillate continuously with a constant energy. This response satisfies to

the relaxed Lyapunov criteria of 0≤V& but the continuous oscillations can

still exist. A controller that continuously yields a negative V& while keeping

Page 44: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

17

the system trajectory inside the region of attraction will result in a system

trajectory that converges asymptotically.

A control that is designed based on this relaxed Lyapunov stability criteria,

relative to a local region of attraction, is referred to as an energy function

based control [17, 18].

1.4. Contribution of Thesis

The main objective of this research is to develop an effective way of

improving the transfer capacity of the power transmission system. The

control proposed emphasizes the weak links in a power system and is

generally independent of the structure of the power system, for instance, the

control is applicable in a longitudinal or meshed power system.

The purpose of this proposed control is to provide synchronization between

generators during first swing while damping the remaining oscillations at

subsequent swings. This has the benefits of maximizing the control

resources through the use of a control strategy that recognizes the existence

of strong and weak links in a large interconnected power system. In general,

the control strategy determines the appropriate control efforts when one

potential mode of separation becomes severely strained to reduce angle

instability in a large power system.

Page 45: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

18

1.5. References

[1] J. Machowski, J. W. Bialek, and J. R. Bumby, Power System Dynamics and Stability: John Wiley & Sons Ltd., 1997.

[2] P. W. Sauer and M. A. Pai, Power System Dynamics and Stability: Prentice Hall, Inc, 1998.

[3] P. Kundur, Power System Stability and Control: McGraw-Hill, Inc, 1994.

[4] J. Arrillaga and C. P. Arnold, Computer Analysis of Power Systems: John Wiley & Sons, 1990.

[5] P. M. Anderson and A. A. Fouad, Power System Control and Stability: IEEE Press, 1994.

[6] P. C. Krause, O. Wasynczuk, and S. D. Schdhoff, Analysis of Electric Machinery: IEEE Press, 1995.

[7] R. P. Schulz, "Synchrounous Machine Modelling," The Symposium - Adequacy and Philosophy of Modelling System Dynamic Perfromnace, San Francisco, July 9-14 1972.

[8] I. J. Perez-Arriaga, G. C. Verghese, and F. C. Schweppe, "Selective Modal Analysis with Applications to Electric Power Systems, Part I and II," IEEE Transactions on Power Apparatus and Systems, vol. PAS-101, No. 9 September 1982.

[9] D. R. Ostojic, "Stabilization of Multimodal Electromecahnical Oscillations by Coordinated Application of Power System Stabilizers," IEEE Transactions on Power Systems, vol. 6, No. 4 November 1991.

[10] J. H. Chow, J. J. Sanchez-Gasca, H. Ren, and S. Wang, "Power System Damping Controller Design- Using Multiple Input Signals," in IEEE Control Systems Magazine, August 2000, pp. 82-90.

[11] J. V. Milanovic, "The Influence of Loads on Power System Electromechanical Oscillation," PhD thesis The University of Newcastle, NSW, Australia, 1996.

[12] N. Ozay and A. N. Guven, "Investigation of Subsynchronous Resonance Risk in the 380KV Turkish Electric Network," IEEE International Symposium on Circuits and Systems, Espoo, Finland, July 1988.

[13] M. Pavella and P. G. Murthy, Transient Stability of Power System Theory and Practice: John Wiley & Sons, 1994.

[14] B. porter and R. Crossley, Modal control: theory and application: Taylor & Francis, London, 1972.

[15] C. Taylor, "Advanced Angle Stability Controls," Cigre Technical Brochure Cigre TF38.02.17, No. 155, pp. 2-2 to 2-8, April 2000.

[16] M. A. Pai, Power System Stability - Analysis by the Direct Method of Lyapunov, vol. 3: North-Holland Publishing Company, 1981.

[17] M. A. Pai, Energy Function Analysis For Power System Stability: Kluwer Academic Publishers, 1989.

Page 46: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

19

[18] G. Ledwich, J. Fernandez-Vargas, and X. Yu, "Switching Control of Multi-machine Power Systems," IEEE / KTH Stockholm Power Tech Conference, Stockholm, Sweden, pp. 138-142, June 1995.

Page 47: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

20

This page is intentionally left blank.

Page 48: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

21

Chapter 2

Existing Control Methods

2.1. Introduction

The dynamics of a power system are non-linear when there are large

changes in the machine states during severe disturbances. However, it is

acceptable to linearize [1 (page 209-219), 2 (page 265-266)] these dynamics

of power systems around an equilibrium operating point (EOP) when

disturbances and states changes are small; this is known as small signal

analysis or small signal stability [3 (page 222-235)]. In the study of power

system stability, several linear and non-linear methods mentioned in [4] can

be used to assess the stability of a linearized or non-linear power system

and, to some extent, these methods can also be used to design its controllers.

Eigenvalue sensitivity, participation factors, Prony analysis [5, 6] (modified

for transfer function identification) and Linear Quadratic Regulator (LQR)

Page 49: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

22

[7] are some of the examples of linear control design technique [4] whereas

adaptive control, cost function, discontinuous control, energy (Lyapunov)

function, normal forms, fuzzy logic and neural network are known as non-

linear control design techniques [4].

One of the limitations of linear control design techniques such as eigenvalue

analysis is the simplification of the set of non-linear power system equations

by linearizing it around an equilibrium operating point, for instance, the

linearization of the swing equations [8, 9 (page141-144)]. This process of

linearizing the swing equations simplifies the non-linear dynamics of the

power system. A concern over the robustness of linear control design

techniques raised by C. Taylor in [4] is the limited set of possible operating

conditions used in stability analysis. These can become crucial as power

system blackouts can be caused by unexpected cascading disturbances. A

power system model should be robust enough to handle these unforeseen

disturbances. Consequently, non-linear control techniques such as the

energy (Lyapunov) function method [10, 11] becomes attractive as its

accuracy is independent of the network structure and has a large region of

validity based on a non-linear system [4].

Another limitation of linear control design techniques is that they require

model reduction as detailed models involve extensive computation

mentioned in [4]. These inherent limitations of linear control techniques and

the need to consider all possible operating conditions, limit the TNSP

Page 50: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

23

companies from using them exclusively in the assessment of the transient

stability of power system. According to [12], TNSP companies are still

relying on the time domain simulation method to assess transient stability as

part of dynamic security assessment (DSA). The main problem they

encounter is the extremely long simulation time required for a typical

transient stability study of a large scale power system. For example, a power

system can consist of 500 buses and 100 machines. In order to reduce the

number of these transient stability studies, power system planners limit

these studies to a few likely scenarios of fault occurrences. From the power

system operators’ perspective, it remains difficult to judge if a power system

is stable even if machine models are simplified, without first looking at a

time domain simulation of machine rotor angles and velocities. These

difficulties can, however, be eliminated if transient stability indicators are

computed by the Lyapunov’s direct method using energy function analysis.

Generally, linear analysis as a control design tool provides a very effective

control of large complex systems and it has desirable properties for small

variations around a single operating point. The robustness of these control

designs becomes uncertain when the operating state of a power system

changes significantly, for example, when severe disturbances cause large

changes in machine states. Hence, the performance of a controller designed

from linear analysis is not guaranteed at post-fault. In contrast, controllers

designed from non-linear analysis such as energy function are capable of

handling a power system's transient instability since energy function does

Page 51: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

24

not use a linearized power system model. Using energy functions as an

analysis tool has the advantage of treating the source of the problem that

causes severe oscillations: the kinetic energy that is injected into

synchronous machines during the fault period.

From the above considerations, it is desirable to carry out a literature review

in the area of non-linear control techniques derived from energy (Lyapunov)

functions. As the control of power system is concerned with the prediction

of transient stability limits, the literature reviews emphasize on certain areas

such as Controlling Unstable Equilibrium Point (UEP), evaluation of

transient energy and methods of stability assessment. The control of power

apparatus such as DC links and Thyristor Controlled Series Compensators

(TCSCs) [13, 14] will also be covered in the literature review as this may

provide insights to the problems encountered in the control of DC links and

TCSC with respect to the damping of unstable modes of separation. Other

areas such as the construction of energy function with the transfer

conductance losses [12, 15, 16], Lyapunov direct method and Lyapunov

stability theorem [17] will not be covered in the literature review.

Page 52: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

25

2.2. Energy Function and Unstable Equilibrium Point

(UEP)

A key concept in power system dynamics is the equilibrium point. At an

equilibrium point, the electrical power flow along the line from each

generators match the mechanical power driving the generators resulting in

zero acceleration in generators. A Stable Equilibrium Point (SEP) is an

operating condition where in response to small disturbances the operating

point will return to the SEP. An Unstable Equilibrium Point (UEP) [18] is

an operating condition where it is not guaranteed if the operating point

would return to the UEP when subject to small disturbances. At an UEP,

when the operating point is subject to small disturbances and moves away

from the UEP instead of returning to it, the power system is said to have

separated into two groups of machines. When a power system is subject to a

severe disturbance, it causes the operating point originally at the SEP to be

driven towards a UEP. The trajectory commonly moves beyond the UEP

and the system separates into two groups. The particular separation is

characteristic of the specific UEP. The UEP characterizing the separation is

described as the Controlling UEP associated with this disturbance. In a

multi-machine power system, there are multiple UEPs where a power

system separation can occur, and it is important to find the correct

Controlling UEP in a transient stability assessment because faults occurring

at different locations in a power system give different Controlling UEPs. In

other words, any UEP can become a Controlling UEP depending on the

Page 53: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

26

location of severe faults and this makes the UEP a unique descriptor of

power system separation.

In a particular operating condition where some UEPs are lying close to each

other, it becomes difficult to determine if a particular UEP is a Controlling

UEP associated with a fault [19]. Several methods were developed to

determine a Controlling UEP amongst many UEPs. These methods are

categorized into two major groups: empirical approaches and theoretical

approaches. The empirical approaches are associated with the Closest UEP

[20, 21], Controlling UEP in the direction of fault-on trajectory [22], Mode

of Disturbance (MOD), Cutset Energy function and critical cluster

identification. The theoretical approaches are Closest UEP [19, 23],

Controlling UEP [19, 24], Potential Energy Boundary Surface (PEBS) [25]

and Boundary of stability based Controlling Unstable equilibrium point

(BCU) [24, 26]. In principal, these different approaches differentiate a

Controlling UEP from a UEP, and they will be reviewed in later sections.

The iterative search algorithms for determining Controlling UEP such as the

Newton-Raphson method [20, 21], gradient system based method [27],

Shadowing method [28], gradient method and ray method [29] and Dynamic

gradient method [29] that detects an exit point even if it is far from a PEBS

will not be covered. The reason for not covering these search algorithms

arises from the need to understand the different interpretations of the

Page 54: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

27

Controlling UEP and not to analyse how these search algorithms reach a

Controlling UEP.

2.2.1. Closest UEP Method

In this approach, the method of finding a Closest UEP and declaring it a

Controlling UEP was first proposed by two groups of researchers that used

two different methodologies.

In [20, 21], an empirical approach was mentioned. The discussion of this

approach is based on a particular disturbance. The UEPs associated with the

post-fault network arising from this disturbance are determined based on a

single-machine-infinite-bus analogy giving UEP angles of sδπ − and

sδπ −− , where sδ is the machine operating angle at the SEP. These UEPs

are associated with the various types of possible machine separations in the

form of a group of generators separated from the rest of the power system.

A Newton-Raphson algorithm is used to obtain a better approximation of

the UEPs in order to evaluate the various potential energy at these UEPs.

The UEP with the lowest potential energy which is in the direction of the

fault trajectory is defined as a Closest UEP. This UEP is designated as the

Controlling UEP associated with the disturbance that yields this fault

trajectory. As this Closest UEP method is based on a UEP that is closest to a

fault-on trajectory, this concept is useful since it differentiates the UEP with

Page 55: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

28

the lowest potential energy from a group of UEPs that are in the direction of

a fault trajectory while determining a Controlling UEP.

The theoretical approach in [19, 23] conditionally defines a Closest UEP as

a Controlling UEP. The Closest UEP found is responsible for system

instability if it is a type-one equilibrium point that belonged to a sub-set of a

stable manifold (i.e. a set of states that converged to the type-one UEP as

time approached positive infinity) around a post-fault equilibrium point. The

energy at the Closest UEP is used as the critical energy. It is noted in [19]

that if a Closest UEP is selected without checking to ensure that it is on a

stable manifold of a post-fault equilibrium point, then an incorrect Closest

UEP with a lower energy would have been found. This approach generally

applies to low order system such as a Single-Machine-Infinite-Bus power

system where it is not too demanding in the computational aspect to find

stable and unstable manifolds of a post-fault equilibrium point and check

that the Closest UEP is on the stability boundary.

2.2.2. UEP in the Direction of a Fault Trajectory

The empirical approach in [22] is based on a fault trajectory and the

Controlling UEP is determined in a different way. This method

approximates a fault trajectory with a non-linear expression in similar form

with a conventional potential energy equation in [17]. At the fault clearance

time, a linearly projected directional vector is constructed based on a post-

Page 56: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

29

fault equilibrium point and a particular singular surface point. This singular

surface point is derived from a set of approximated potential energy

equations for the fault trajectory when a maximum power mismatch along a

fault trajectory has occurred. This is similar to a fault clearance time when

the system trajectory is at a maximum. As the directional vector is

minimized as a one dimensional minimization problem, an intersection

between the directional vector and the boundary of separation is found. The

intersection is used as an initial guessing point in an iterative algorithm that

searched an exact UEP. This approach is classified as a Controlling UEP in

the direction of a fault trajectory [18] and is useful in identifying the

Controlling UEP amongst a group of UEPs where some of them are outside

the region of attraction. It appears that in a multi-machine power system

where one or more UEP lies close to each other than the linear projection of

a directional vector may result in an incorrect Controlling UEP.

2.2.3. Controlling UEP Method

The Controlling UEP method in [19, 24] relies on the exit point of fault-on

trajectory that crosses a stability boundary. If an exit point belonges to a

stable manifold, defined as an invariant sets of a system where every

trajectory started from this set of states will remains in it for all time t [18,

page 1500], of an UEP then a Controlling UEP is found. In [17, page 166],

invariant set is defined for a power system problem as “the set of all

trajectories of the post-fault system … whose initial conditions … lies on

Page 57: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

30

the faulted trajectory … for the fault i.” However, this method is considered

to be a nontrivial approach in [25] as it requires all type-one UEP’s on a

stability boundary to be identified prior to the determination of their

respective stable manifolds. This approach is limited in its application

because it requires the stable manifold of every post-fault equilibrium point

to be found.

2.2.4. PEBS based Controlling UEP Method

This Potential Energy Boundary Surface (PEBS) method in [30] is

theoretically treated in [25] to approximate a PEBS to a stability boundary

in a ) ,( ?δ domain such that a constant energy surface obtained from PEBS

can be used as a close approximation to the stability boundary (a stability

boundary is a union of stable manifolds where type-one UEPs can be found)

of a post-fault equilibrium point )0 ,( sδ . The key to using the PEBS method

is to detect a PEBS crossing in a gradient system (or simply the Potential

Energy surface). Since PEBS is also a union of the stable manifolds of the

type-one UEPs [25] in a gradient system, any stable manifold that containes

this PEBS crossing point will lead to a Controlling UEP. The constant

energy surface of a Controlling UEP in a gradient system is used as a local

approximation to a stability boundary in ) ,( ?δ domain. However, PEBS

will fail if a fault-on trajectory passes the stable manifold before crossing

Page 58: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

31

the constant energy surfaces. The potential energy surface is useful as it can

confirm visually if UEP is on the stability boundary.

2.2.5. BCU Method

This BCU method is known as the Boundary of stability based Controlling

Unstable equilibrium point method (BCU) and is proposed in [24, 26]. It is

related to the PEBS method mentioned in [25] but the BCU method does not

involve tedious steps in finding a stable manifold that contained an exit

point (or PEBS crossing point) instead it uses its controlling UEP's constant

energy surface as an approximation to a stability boundary. While solving a

set of non-linear algebraic equations based on a gradient system, an initial

guess point close to an exit point at fault clearance is used to reach a

Controlling UEP. This method is cumbersome as it requires one to solve a

set of non-linear algebraic equations at fault clearance which could be time

consuming.

2.2.6. Mode of Disturbance Method

This Mode of Disturbance (MOD) method in [31-33] is an empirical

approach. It emphasizes that the Controlling UEP associated with a

candidate mode has the lowest normalized potential energy margin. In the

MOD test, a candidate mode is defined as the separation between two

Page 59: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

32

groups of machines formed during transient stage; one consisted of the

critical machines and the other contained the remaining machines. A

normalized potential energy margin is evaluated by the ratio of the potential

energy margin ..EPV∆ and corrEKV |.. . ..EPV∆ is

...... EPcl

EPU

EP VVV −=∆

where U indicates the energy evaluated at the UEP and cl indicates the

energy evaluated a fault clearing.

The corrected transient kinetic energy responsible for separation corrEKV |.. is

2~

|.. 21

= eqeqcorrEK MV ω

where syscr

syscreq MM

MMM

+=

* and )(

~~~

syscreq ωωω −= .

The crM is the sum of all machines inertia in a critical machine group and

sysM is the sum of all machine inertia in a system machine group. The

notation ~

crω is the centre of area motion of a critical machine group and

~

sysω is a centre of area motion of a system machine group.

The screening of all candidate modes in [33] is based on the disturbances

effect on various machines during a MOD test. The method is simplified in

[34] by ranking kinetic energy and acceleration of all machines at fault

clearance. A short-listing of all machine indices with kinetic energy (KE)

and acceleration (ACC) higher than 50 percent of the respective maximum

value of KE and ACC resultes in a small set of candidate machines. Three

Page 60: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

33

distinct machine indices groupings are then formed such that group A

containes the common machine indices found from a KE and ACC list,

group B containes all machine indices from KE list and group C containes

all machine indices from ACC list. Three further machine groups are formed

with each group selected from groups A, B and C. The process of evaluating

the normalized potential energy margins ( ..EPV∆ ) of these three machine

groups and associating a Controlling UEP to the critical machine group with

the lowest ..EPV∆ is being called the MOD testing method. This method can

exclude machines that may lead to different potential separations when the

short-listing of machines is based on 50 percents of KE and ACC.

2.2.7. Critical Cluster Method

The critical cluster method in [35, 36] is extended from the Extended Equal

Area Criterion transient stability studies. This method uses a machine initial

acceleration at fault clearance to select the likely candidates of critical

cluster. A group of machines that is accelerated above a pre-defined level at

fault clearing is selected and the combination of these machines forms

candidate critical clusters. Each candidate’s critical clearing angle is then

evaluated by solving a set of non-linear algebraic equations until the

stability margin η vanishes.

)()()( cacccdecc AA δδδη −=

Page 61: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

34

where )(⋅η is the stability margin, )(⋅decA is a deceleration area and )(⋅accA

is an acceleration area.

A critical clearing angle in a fourth-order Taylor series expansion computes

a critical clearing time and corrective factors are used in the series to avoid a

deteriorating accuracy due to a truncation of higher order terms. An actual

critical cluster is then identified from a candidate list as the one that has the

lowest critical clearing time.

An improved critical cluster identification technique is proposed in [37, 38]

which uses both machine acceleration and pre-fault transfer admittance

between a machine and a fault location to evaluate a product term. This

acceleration and pre-fault transfer conductance product term selectes likely

candidates of critical cluster. The selection of critical cluster based on

acceleration can exclude potential machines that cause separation. The use

of pre-fault admittance as one of the selection criteria may have indicated

the vulnerability in the interconnection between two machines but its

influence can be small compares to machine accelerations.

2.2.8. Cutset Energy Function

The cutset energy function in [39-41] examines the vulnerability of

transmission lines between two groups of machines. The main step of this

Page 62: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

35

method is to obtain all possible cutsets of two internal nodes corresponding

to machine terminal. Every cutset is identified by considering every possible

flow between two internal nodes with both positive and negative flows

between nodes considered. In this aspect, a cutset consists of transmission

lines indices (i.e. ith line or jth line), and each kth transmission line has two

vulnerability coefficients lkµ and u

∫ −=lk

ok

duu ok

lk

σ

σσµ )sin(sin

∫ −=uk

ok

duu ok

uk

σ

σσµ )sin(sin

where okσ (inter-nodal angle) is a stable equilibrium point of kth line,

ok

lk σπσ −−= and o

kuk σπσ −= .

From the vulnerability coefficient, vulnerability index of each ith line is

∑∑−+

+=+

ii C

lkk

C

ukki bb µµυ

∑∑−+

− +=iC

ukk

iC

lkki bb µµυ

where kb is a line admittance, +iC is a cutset with positive line flows

referenced to an ith node and −iC is a cutset with negative line flows

referenced to an ith node.

Both +iυ and −

iυ are interpreted as two modes of angle separation and the

lowest value of iυ (or +iυ ) becomes a vulnerability index of a cutset. As

Page 63: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

36

shown in [41], a large cutset list can be reduced to a smaller list of candidate

cutsets that contains only the lines with faults. A Controlling UEP is related

to a critical cutset that is being selected from a group of fault related cutsets.

The critical cutset selected has the lowest vulnerability index among those

in the group. This cutset energy function evaluates the vulnerability of a

cutset based on the vulnerability coefficients and these approaches may

helps in the understanding of how a power system separates. The evaluation

of vulnerability indices iυ and +iυ of every possible cutset based on the

flow direction determined during steady state may not agree with the power

swing direction during transient. It appears that the lists of possible cutsets

between two internal nodes are large and it may become computational

demanding when In a multi-machine power system, it may be too

computationally demanding to determine a list of critical cutsets since the

possible list of cutsets between two internal nodes (i.e. generator) are long

for the relatively practical example in [12, page 68].

2.3. Methods of Stability Assessments

In our earlier sections, we have reviewed the methods of determining a

Controlling UEP. This section looks at the methods of transient stability

assessments using critical energy [19-22, 24, 25, 32, 33, 36-41] and

convergence analysis [42, 43].

Page 64: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

37

For the approach that requires one to find a Controlling UEP such as in [19-

22, 24, 25], an energy function is used to evaluate the critical energy at the

Controlling UEP. As the total energy evaluated at post-fault exceeds this

critical energy, it implies that the power system will be unstable. In these

references [19-22, 24, 25], different types of energy function are considered.

For the cutset approach in [40, 41], cutset energy function is used to

evaluate the critical energy at the vulnerable cutset. At post-fault, if the total

energy exceeds this critical energy evaluated at the vulnerable cutset, the

power system will become unstable.

For the Mode of Disturbance (MOD) approach in [32, 33, 39], a critical

MOD is selected amongst all candidate MODs that is in the direction of the

fault-on trajectory and a corrected energy function is used to evaluate the

critical energy or the normalised potential energy margin associated with

this critical MOD. As a corrected kinetic energy evaluated at post-fault

exceeds the energy of the critical MOD, transient instability will occur.

In the extended equal area criterion approach in [36-38], the approach

determines the critical cluster as the one with the lowest critical clearing

time among all candidate clusters. The critical clearing times of all clusters

are being evaluated based on the equal area criterion of a two-Machine-

equivalent model. If the fault clearing time exceeds this critical clearing

time of the critical cluster, power system will become unstable.

Page 65: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

38

Lyapunov stability concept is used in the convergence analysis such as in

[42, 43],. At post-fault, if the total kinetic energy in the power system

reduces monotonically then the power system will be stable. The Lyapunov

function is based on the energy function

−∑−∑++∑

=dt?T-

haftplied by sEnergy supuctorsred in indEnergy storotationEnergy of

V

oCOA

where first term is referred to as the kinetic energy, the second and third

terms are referred to as the potential energy with the energy dissipated from

the transfer conductance neglected and the last term is the centre of area

motion. Centre of area motion refers to the perfect governors [15, 17] added

to all generators to ensure a balance between the shaft and delivered power.

This allows swing equations to focus on the differences between generators

angles. In [15], since the presence of TCOA ensured that a centre of area does

not accelerate, the centre of area motion term in the aforesaid energy

function equation is effectively zero.

If the rate of change of Lyapunov function V& is negative along the direction

of the fault trajectory, the power system will be asymptotically stable. V& is

in the form of

( )∑=

+=n

iiii fmV

1)(δδδ &&&&

Page 66: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

39

where )(δf is a function of δ , m is machine inertia, n is the total number

of machines and both δ& and δ&& are the respective machine angle and

angular velocity derivatives.

2.4. Evaluation of Transient Energy

The transient energy that is responsible for a power system separation can

be evaluated at a Controlling UEP [19-22, 24, 25], a critical MOD [32, 33,

39], a critical cutset [40, 41] or a critical cluster [36-38] using different

energy functions. These different energy functions are generally capable of

predicting instability at a fault clearance and informing an operator

accordingly. However, in a large power system, experiences in the selection

of a critical set of separations amongst the many types of separations are

often required. This is because a critical system separation depends on the

location of faults.

2.5. Energy Function Based Switching Control

Energy function based switching controls in [42, 43] use Lyapunov stability

criteria as the basis to derive the control law. Considering a delta-connected

three-machine system such as in [42], the rate of change of energy function

V& is

Page 67: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

40

[ ])sin(dd?)sin(dd?)sin(dd?U? )f(dV 232323a131313a121212aa&&&& ++−= ,

where ija? is the change in line reactance between an ith and a jth buses due

to a capacitor switching (by Uα) on a line.

The switching control Uα can be determined by keeping the rate of change

of energy V& most negative to yield an asymptotic behaviour in the system

trajectory. Hence the control law is designed to respond to the g terms

++=

•••

)sin(dd?)sin(dd?)sin(dd? 232323a131313a121212ag

A non-linear control law for the control of series capacitor becomes

<>

= 0 gfor 0

0 gfor 1αU

The control switching between 1 and 0 represents the respective switching

in and out of the series capacitor. The case where the control switches

between +1 and -1 was not considered in [42] as the series capacitor

compensator consisted of only capacitor rather than both capacitor and

inductor in the case of SVC control. This energy function based control is

used in the research as it has attractive properties with regards to the

reduction of disturbance energy.

Page 68: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

41

2.6. Control of DC Link and TCSC

We have reviewed the energy related controls and use of critical energy at

UEP to predict system instability. In this section, the control of DC link and

Thyristor controlled series capacitor (TCSC) are covered.

In general, power apparatus such as braking resistors, DC links and

quadrature booster system are used to modulate real power flows in power

system. These power apparatus are capable of supplying and absorbing real

power flows. Braking resistor cannot supply real power and can only absorb

real power for short duration. A reactive power-modulating device is

generally referred to as a Flexible AC Transmission System (FACT) device

which provides the shunt compensation via a Static VAR Compensator

(SVC) or series compensation via a TCSC. As SVC are installed near loads

to provide the voltage modulation of load which is more efficient in the

support of voltage at the receiving end of a transmission line, this

modulation of reactive power flows in SVC also changes the real power

flows to the loads. Increasing the value of SVC will increase the voltage at

the SVC bus. This in turn will increase the voltage at the load buses in

proximity. This increase of voltage will result in the increase of power flow

to the load. Thus SVC is seen as an indirect modulator of real power in the

power system. Insertion of series capacitor can help reduce the effective line

impedance. One difficulty with the use of fixed capacitors is the potential

result of causing sub-synchronous resonance (SSR). When line resonance

Page 69: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

42

matches the generator shaft resonance, there is potential for shaft damage

[44]. The control of series reactive element in TCSC avoids this issue by

active control. In many cases, it has been found that TCSC 13, 14, 44, 45] is

much more effective in modulating power flow than a SVC [46-49] of

equivalent rating. In this part of the literature review, the control of DC link

and TCSC are reviewed.

2.6.1. History of HVDC Link

The HVDC system has long been recognized as a preferred tool to transfer

bulk power over long distances as compared to a HVAC system. The

records in [45] shows the different justifications used in various countries

when a HVDC system is being implemented.

From a system stability point of view, both the shunt/ series compensations

and HVDC link systems offer good contributions in damping oscillations

[46, 47]. Several reasons for the use of HVDC link are the ease of future

expansion, the ease of transferring bulk power over long distances without

the need of intermediate reactive compensations and the ease of controlling

two systems with different frequency [45, 48, 49]. Apart from these reasons,

recent developments in semiconductor technology [50, 51] have further

encouraged the use of HVDC systems, for instance, the use of Insulated

Gate Bipolar Transistor (IGBT) based converters allows the connection of

HVDC device to weak AC system. This is due to the possibility of

Page 70: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

43

modulating reactive power independently from real power. The records in

[45-49] have shown that HVDC system is being extensively used to control

large power transfer and provide fast control in the damping of oscillations.

2.6.2. Considerations in the Use of DC Link to Damp

Oscillations

When a HVDC link is used to damp oscillations in a large power system, its

damping action will reduce the disturbances at one end but will also produce

some disturbances at the other end [48] (page 138-140). This control action

could result in a frequency variation above a normal frequency.

When two AC power systems interconnected with a DC link are

significantly different in size, a system inertia based weighting [48] can be

used in a DC link control to share disturbances in a pre-determined manner

and damp system oscillations simultaneously. In the control of power

system during the transient period, some level of DC link capacity can be

provided [48] to overcome the overloading of a DC link during the first

swing whereas in the dynamic stability context, damping of oscillations can

be achieved without overloading the DC link.

Page 71: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

44

2.6.3. Using Different Control Schemes to Supplement the

Control of Inverter

In response to disturbances in the AC system at the inverter side of a HVDC

system, large variations in the AC current and AC voltage are expected.

Different control schemes are used to overcome these issues as well as those

mentioned in [47, 52]. In [46], a DC link design is reported to emphasize the

damping of both the inter-area and local area modes.

In [47], a back-to-back HVDC link interconnecting two different power

systems was considered as shown in Figure 2.1. The control strategy is

based on several schemes such as the use of low voltage DC current limiter,

power stabilizer and an inverter current control. A DC current limiter at an

inverter station limits a large variation in DC current that follows after the

fault clearance. As the disturbances in weak AC system on the inverter side

can cause a large DC current variation and a severe voltage fluctuation, a

power stabilizer is installed at the inverter station to damp power

oscillations separately. The power stabilizer is designed using a linear

analysis to enhance the low damping factor at an existing bus that

experiences an oscillation around 1Hz. An integrated control action

consisted of a low voltage DC current limiter and a power stabilizer are used

to damp the inverter AC voltage and this can result in a limiting effect on

the DC current. This has a rapid damping effect on the bus 5’s (Figure 2.1)

power fluctuations. In order to reduce the voltage fluctuation at the inverter

Page 72: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

45

side during the fault recovery period to boost control performance during

the transient period, the inverter is designed to operate in a current control

mode instead of the gamma control mode, used during a steady state

operation. The use of the above control schemes in [47] prevents a weak AC

system at the inverter side from separating when additional power is being

injected into it by the new DC link. This is a typical operating situation [47]

whereby a DC link can deteriorate an existing weak AC system at the

inverter station. Figure 2.1 shows a simplified back-to-back DC link

configuration that interconnects two AC power systems. This coordination

between power stabilizer and control of inverter in current control mode has

shown that it is possible to design each controller separately for different

purposes.

Figure 2.1: A back-to-back DC link interconnecting two AC power systems

In [52], it was shown that Root Locus analysis could be used to determine

the best feedback signal for inverter control which used a locally available

feedback signal. Locally available DC and AC variables such as direct

current, direct voltage, AC voltage (magnitude and angle) and AC current

Back to back DC system Receiving end Sending end

4 5 6

Power flow Power flow

1 2 3

Page 73: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

46

(magnitude and angle) are selected. The analysis based on the movement of

eigenvalues using these variables as feedback signals and their effect on

SCR (short circuit ratio) reduction suggests that an AC current angle is the

preferred feedback signal. It is also important that this AC current angle

signal results in a pair of stable zeros whereas other signals gives rise to

unstable zeros. The stable zeros allow a wider range of control gain to be

used. This choice of feedback signal is in contrast to the conventional

HVDC system design that uses direct current as the feedback signal at

rectifier and the gamma angle as the feedback signal at inverter. The process

identifies the relations between SCR and eigenvalues pair such that low

system strength with low SCR such as 1.1 can unstablize a pair of critically

stable eigenvalues. The use of Eigenvalue analysis to select control input is

important in control design to ensure the feedback control yields both stable

zeros and stable close-loops as the control gain increases.

In [46], it was shown that the damping of the inter-area and local area

modes could be effective when an active power modulation scheme was

used in the rectifier and a voltage modulation scheme was used in an

inverter. The test system consists of a DC link installed in parallel with an

AC tie line. The intention is to investigate the effect of dual modulation on

machine interactions responses at the sending end of the DC link. The first

problem encountered in this paper is the increase in DC link power transfer

that resulted in the reduction of the power transfer across the parallel AC tie

line [46]. This is due to the reactive loading at the HVDC terminal stations

Page 74: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

47

that causes a reduction in AC voltage and affects the loadings of AC lines

and magnitude of local loads. This reduction in the AC line loadings defeats

the purposes of the HVDC system. The second problem in this paper is

concerned with the control mode interactions that occurred when the

controllers are not being coordinated properly. It is found that the control

mode interactions limits the gain of the controller such that any further

increases in the gain will lead to the a mode of oscillation becoming

destabilized. The effect of the dual modulation using power modulation at

the rectifier station and voltage modulation at an inverter station reduces the

control mode interactions and improves the AC power transfer limit by

reducing the reactive power constraints at the inverter side. This dual

modulation control is designed from the linear-quadratic-Gaussian control

theory. The different modulation controls used in rectifier and inverter is

effective in reducing the effect of control interaction.

2.6.4. Discontinuous Control of Thyristor Controlled Series

Compensation (TCSC)

Time optimal control of TCSC is used to stabilize a two-area system

interconnected with three parallel AC tie lines such as in [53]. The time

optimal control requires Xcmax, Xc

min and Xcs to be selected where Xc

max,

Xcmin and Xc

s are the maximum, the minimum and the steady state series

compensating capacitance respectively. A bang-bang switching control that

Page 75: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

48

switches between the Xcmax and Xc

min is based on a control strategy of

single-switch approach. The Xcmin is selected to include a post-fault

equilibrium point under its control influence while the Xcmax is selected to

enlarge a stability domain. The single-switch approach at post-fault forced a

system trajectory to approach a time-optimal switching line in an enlarged

stability domain which is created from the influence of Xcmax. As the

trajectory intersects the switching line, Xcmin is switched in and drives the

system trajectory to a post-fault stable equilibrium point (SEP). When the

system reaches the post-fault SEP, a steady state Xcs replaces the Xc

min. This

single-switch approach requires a fairly precise design of switching line that

brings the trajectory towards the post-fault SEP and is dependent on the

nature of a particular fault it was designed to response to.

In [42], a discontinuous switching control based on the function is derived

for a hypothetical case of a delta-connected three-machine system where a

TCSC is applied between its line 1 and 2. The control law is designed to

switch between the limits of 1 and 0

<>

=0dsind0 for 0dsind1 for

U1212

1212a )(

)(&&

where 12d& is the angular velocity difference of machine 1 and 2. It is shown

that the oscillation associated with machine 1 and 2 is well damped but the

system remains oscillatory owing to the presence of a remaining oscillatory

mode associated with the oscillation between machine 2 and 3. It is found

that this remaining mode of oscillation is not significantly influenced by the

Page 76: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

49

modulation of line 1 and 2. When two TCSCs are used, each installed

between the line 1 and 2 and the line 1 and 3, both the modes are well

damped and the energy decayes to zero. This has shown that n modes

requires n controllers in order to achieve overall system stability.

2.7. Wide Area Control

Wide area control is a control strategy where controllers are designed to act

on remote data obtained from wide area measurement such as those used in

the regional protection and control scheme in [54] and the transmission

highway strategy in [55]. Other examples of controls that are designed

based on wide area information are [56-59]. In general, wide area control

consists of two main categories: event-based and response-based [54, 60].

An event-based wide area control initiates control action upon detection of

power apparatus outage while a response-based wide area control only

initiates remedy action when specific system responses reaches some pre-

defined threshold condition.

This made the response-based control relatively slower than the event-based

control, however, the advantage of the response-based control is its ability

to response to some of the events that are not easily detected or not

sufficiently well defined.

Page 77: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

50

A wide area response-based control is different from a conventional

centralized control. In wide area control, Global Positioning System (GPS)

gives a reliable measurement of data based on common time stamps

whereas the conventional supervisory centre performs data analysis,

ignoring the time skew factor, on all collected data measurement prior to

sending them out to relevant control centres.

2.7.1. Centralized and Wide Area Control

In [61], the results of applying power modulation to a HVDC system using

linear decentralized and centralized approaches were compared. It is shown

that a centralized modulation based on remote data allows better

performance of multi-terminal HVDC system in damping oscillations. The

decentralized control system pre-assigns a terminal for voltage-control while

a centralized control uses its supervisory program to determine and assign a

new voltage-controlling terminal for an effective modulation during the

transient period. When a disturbance such as load rejection is applied, a

decentralized modulation scheme that pre-assigns a terminal for control will

reach its limit at a first swing [61]. This is because the HVDC terminal pre-

assigned for voltage control has to be overloaded prior to any further

improvement in system damping. On the other hand, a centralized

modulation scheme shows the possibility of increasing system damping

when its supervisory program performs a weighted distribution of

modulating signals to all terminals [61] and allows all terminals to

Page 78: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

51

participate in modulation to share disturbances. This avoids overloading of a

terminal. This form of wide area control using centralized concept appears

to be useful when many controllers are involved and coordination of these

controllers becomes critical.

In [62], a decentralized controller that used remote data was presented. This

paper uses a Global positioning system (GPS) to obtain synchronized

measurements of remote generators' data to design its controllers for the

control of a three-machine nine-bus system. When the test system is

subjected to a 100ms earth fault, significant damping is observed. It is

indicated that a decentralized control can be made to perform well using

remote data measurement via GPS. This form of wide area control based on

decentralized control concept uses remote measurements can be

comparatively fast in response time as compared to the wide area control

designed based on the concept of centralized control where all decision are

weighted centrally.

2.8. Discussion

It has been shown that energy (Lyapunov) function method is capable of

determining whether a system converges or diverges by inspecting the rate

of change of energy V& based on the Lyapunov stability theorem. The

controlled power system will show monotonic convergence provided the

Page 79: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

52

conditions such as a positive definite energy function V , a semi-negative

definite rate of change of energy function V& , a fast governor control and the

post-fault trajectory that lies inside the region of attraction are being

satisfied. The possibility of deriving a switching control law from a V&

equation as in [42] is promising in the control of power system especially

when such a control law is insensitive to system structure and system

operating conditions.

The evaluation of critical energy and critical separation group using various

methods such as in [19-22, 24, 25, 32, 33, 36-41] are useful as this literature

review make us understand the different ways of determining a Controlling

UEP. It is also clear that finding a correct Controlling UEP that is in the

direction of a fault trajectory (or closest to a fault trajectory) is crucial in

determining the correct critical energy. In control design, if the lowest

energy is not the critical energy, this may give rise to conservative results in

assessing stability.

The ability of a controller to recognize a Controlling UEP and the critical

energy that is responsible for a power system separation may give an

efficient damping performance in a control design since control efforts can

be directed to the correct mode of separation.

In the control of a DC link, stabilization of AC voltage at an inverter station

is critical. The use of a gamma control during steady state and the use of a

Page 80: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

53

current control during the transient period reduce inverter voltage

fluctuation. Control mode interaction that limits the gain of controllers is

one of the concerns in control design, for instance, the control of DC link in

the literature review. The coordination between the power modulation at the

rectifier and the voltage modulation at the inverter appears to reduce this

control mode interaction and allows a larger range of gain to use in control

design. It is also noted in the literature review concerning the DC linked

power system that a large power system consists of strong and weak areas

and a control that can recognize this problem and direct appropriate efforts

to these areas correctly may extend the limit of power transfer in the

transmission network.

The improvements in communication technology have made remote

measurements feasible. It has also made the coordination of controllers

much easier in terms of using remote data that is on a common time

reference. The wide area control in [61] shows that conventional

decentralized control performs less satisfactorily than the centralized

control. It is also shown in [62] that a decentralized control of Power

System Stabilizers (PSSs) that uses remote measurements (or wide area

information) can result in satisfactory damping performance. From a wide

area control perspective, it is possible that a control strategy that uses

remote measurements may achieve multi-mode damping results.

Page 81: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

54

2.9. References

[1] P. M. Anderson and A. A. Fouad, Power System Control and Stability:

IEEE Press, 1994. [2] A. R. Bergen, Power Systems Analysis: Prentice Hall, 1986. [3] P. W. Sauer and M. A. Pai, Power System Dynamics and Stability:

Prentice Hall, Inc, 1998. [4] C. Taylor, "Advanced Angle Stability Controls," Cigre Technical

Brochure Cigre TF38.02.17, No. 155, pp. 2-2 to 2-8, April 2000. [5] P. S. Dolan, J. R. Smith, and W. A. Mittelstadt, "Prony Analysis and

Modelling of a TCSC Under Modulation Control," 4th IEEE conference on Control Applications, Albany, NY, USA, pp. 239-245, September 1995.

[6] D. J. Trudnowski, J. R. Smith, T. A. Short, and D. A. Pierre, "An application of prony methods in PSS design for multimachine systems," IEEE Transactions on Power Systems, vol. 6, No. 1, pp. 118-126, February 1991.

[7] B. D. O. Anderson and J. B. Moore, Optimal Control, Linera Quadratic Methods 1991.

[8] E. W. Kimbark, Power System Stability: IEEE Press, 1995. [9] J. Machowski, J. W. Bialek, and J. R. Bumby, Power System

Dynamics and Stability: John Wiley & Sons Ltd., 1997. [10] P. D. Aylett, "The Energy-Integral Criterion of Transient Stability

Limits of Power Systems," Proceedings IEE, vol. 105(C), pp. 527-536, July 1958.

[11] M. C. Magnusson, "The Transient -Energy Method of Calculating Stability," American Institute of Electrical Engineers Transactions, vol. 66, pp. 747-755, 1947.

[12] M. A. Pai, Energy Function Analysis For Power System Stability: Kluwer Academic Publishers, 1989.

[13] C. Gama, "Brazilian North-South Interconnection control-application and operating experience with a TCSC," IEEE Power Engineering Society Summer Meeting, Edmonton, Alta. , Canada,vol. 2, pp. 1103 -1108, July 1999.

[14] G. N. Taranto, J.-K. Shiau, J. H. Chow, and H. A. Othman, "A robust decentralized control design for damping controllers in FACTS applications," Control Applications, Albany, NY , USA, pp. 233 -238, Sepetember 1995.

[15] G. Ledwich and E. Palmer, "Energy Function For Power Systems with Transmission Losses," IEEE Transactions on Power Systems, vol. 12, No. 2, pp. 785-790, May 1997.

[16] A. A. Fouad and S. E. Stanton, "Transient Stability of A Multi-Machine Power System. Part I: Investigation of System Trajectories," IEEE Transactions on Power Apparatus and Systems, vol. PAS-100, No. 7, pp. 3417-3424, July 1981.

Page 82: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

55

[17] M. A. Pai, Power System Stability - Analysis by the Direct Method of Lyapunov, vol. 3: North-Holland Publishing Company, 1981.

[18] H. D. Chiang, C.-C. Chu, and G. Cauley, "Direct Stability Analysis of Electric Power Systems Using Energy Functions: Theory, Applications, and Perspective," Proceedings of the IEEE, vol. 83, No. 11, pp. 1497-1528, November 1995.

[19] H. D. Chiang, F. F. Wu, and P. P. Varaiya, "Foundations Of Direct Methods For Power System Transient Stability Analysis," IEEE Transactions on Circuits and Systems, vol. CAS-34, No.2, pp. 160-173, February 1987.

[20] F. S. Prabhakara and A. H. El-Abiad, "A simplified determination of transient stability regions for Lyapunov methods," IEEE Transactions on Power Apparatus and Systems, vol. PAS-94, No. 2, pp. 672-680, March/April 1975.

[21] C. L. Gupta and A. H. El-Abiad, "Determination of the closest unstable equilibrium state for Liapunov methods in transient stability studies," IEEE Transactions on Power Apparatus and Systems, vol. PAS-95, No. 5, pp. pp. 1699-1712, September/ October 1976.

[22] T. Athay, R. Podmore, and S. Virmani, "A practical method for the direct analysis of transient stability," IEEE Transactions on Power Apparatus and Systems, vol. PAS-98, No. 2, pp. 573-584, March/April 1979.

[23] H. D. Chiang and J. S. Thorp, "The Closest Unstable Equilibrium Point Method for Power System Dynamic Security Assessment," IEEE Transactions on Circuits and Systems, vol. 36, No. 9, pp. 1187-1199, September 1989.

[24] H. D. Chiang, F. F. Wu, and P. P. Varaiya, "A BCU Method for Direct Analysis of Power System Transient Stability," IEEE Transactions on Power Systems, vol. 9, No. 3, pp. 1194-1208, August 1994.

[25] H. D. Chiang, F. F. Wu, and P. P.Varaiya, "Foundations Of The Potential Eneegy Boundary Surface Method For Power System Transient Stability Analysis," IEEE Transactions on Circuits and Systems, vol. 35, No. 6, pp. 712-728, June 1988.

[26] H. D. Chiang and C.-c. Chu, "Theoritical Foundation Of The BCU Method For Direct Stability ANalysis Of Network-Reduction Powerr System Models With Small Transfer Conductances.," IEEE Transactions on Circuits and Systems - I: Fundamental Theory And Application, vol. 42, No.5, pp. 252-265, May 1995.

[27] C.-W. Liu and J. S. Thorp, "A novel method to compute the closest unstable equilibrium point for the transient stability region estimate in power systems," IEEE Transactions on circuits and Systems-I: Fundamental Theory And Applications, vol. 44, No. 7, pp. 630-635, July 1997.

[28] R. T. Treinen, V. Vittal, and W. Kliemann, "An Improved Technique to Determine the Controlling Unstable Equilibrium Point in a Power System," IEEE Transactions on Circuits and Systems I: Fundamental Theory and Applications, vol. 43, No. 4, pp. 313-323, 1996.

Page 83: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

56

[29] J. T. Scruggs and L. Mili, "Dynamic Gradient Method for PEBS Detection in Power System Transient Stability Assessment," Internation Journal of Electrical Power and Energy Systems, vol. 23, pp. 155-165, 2001.

[30] N. Kakimoto, Y. Ohsawa, and M. Hayashi, "Transient Stability Analysis of Electric Power System via Lure-Type Lyapunov Function, Part I and Part II," Transactions of IEE of Japan, vol. 98, pp. 516, 1978.

[31] A. A. Fouad and S. E. Stanton, "Transient Stability of A Multi-Machine Power System. Part II: Critical Transient Energy," IEEE Transactions on Power Apparatus and Systems, vol. PAS-100, No. 7, pp. 3417-3424, July 1981.

[32] A. A. Fouad and V. Vittal, "The Transient Energy Function Method," International Journal of Electrical Power and Energy Systems, vol. 10, No. 4, pp. 233-246, October 1988.

[33] A. A. Fouad, V. Vittal, and T. K. Oh, "Critical Energy For Direct Transient Stability Assessment of A Multimachine Power System," IEEE Transactions on Power Apparatus and Systems, vol. PAS-103, No. 8, pp. 2199-2206, August 1984.

[34] A. A. Fouad and V. Vittal, Power System Transient Stability Analysis - Using the Transient Energy Function Method: Prentice-Hall, Inc., 1992.

[35] Y. Xue, T. V. Vutsem, and M. Ribbens-Pavella, "Extended Equal Area Criterion Justifications, Generalizations, Applications," IEEE Transactions on Power Systems, vol. 4, No. 1, pp. 44-52, February 1989.

[36] Y. Xue, T. V. Cutsem, and M. Ribbens-Pavella, "A Simplified Direct method For Fast Transient Stability Assessment of Large Power System," IEEE Transactions on Power Systems, vol. 3, No. 2, pp. 400-412, May 1988.

[37] Y. Xue, et al., "Extended Equal Area Criterion Revisted," IEEE Transactions on Power Systems, vol. 7, No. 3, pp. 1012-1022, Augist 1992.

[38] Y. Xue and M. Pavella, "Critical-cluster identification in Transient Stability Studies," IEE Proceedings-C, vol. 140, No. 6, pp. 481-489, November 1993.

[39] G. Cai, G. Mu, Z. Liu, and Z. Lin, "The Trajectory Based Network Transient Energy Evaluation and Its Application to Enhancement of Transient Stability," POWERCON '98,vol. 2, pp. 1369-1373 1998.

[40] A. R. Bergen and D. J. Hill, "A structure Preserving Model For Power System Stability Analysis," IEEE Transactions on Power Apparatus and Systems, vol. PAS-100, No. 1, pp. 25-35, January 1981.

[41] K. S. Chandrashekhar and D. J. Hill, "Cutset Stability Criterion For Power Systems Using A Structure-Preserving Model," Internation Journal of Electrical Power and Energy Systems, vol. 8, No. 3, pp. 146-157, July 1986.

Page 84: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

57

[42] G. Ledwich, J. Fernandez-Vargas, and X. Yu, "Switching Control of Multi-machine Power Systems," IEEE / KTH Stockholm Power Tech Conference, Stockholm, Sweden, pp. 138-142, June 1995.

[43] E. Palmer and G. Ledwich, "Switching control for power systems with line lossess," IEE Proceedings- Generation, Transmission, Distributions, vol. 146, No.5, pp. 435-440, September 1999.

[44] P. M. Anderson, B. L. Agrawal, and J. E. Vanness, Subsynchronous resonance in Power System: IEEE Press, 1989.

[45] C. Adamson, et al., High Voltage Direct Current Converters and Systems: Macdonald & Co. Ltd., 1965.

[46] C. E. Grund, E. M. Pollard, H. Patel, S. L. Nilsson, and J. Reeve, "Power Modulation Controls for HVDC Systems," Cigre, vol. 14-03, pp. 1-8, 1982.

[47] A. E. Hammad, J. Gagnon, and D. McCallum, "Improving The Dynamic Performance Of A Complex AC/DC System By HVDC Modifications," IEEE Transactions on Power Delivery, vol. 5, No. 4, pp. 1934-1943, 1990.

[48] J. Arrillaga, High Voltage Direct Current Transmission-2nd Edition: IEE, 1998.

[49] E. W. Kimbark, Direct Current Transmission, Vol. I: John Wiley & Sons, Inc, 1971.

[50] G. Asplund, et al., "DC transmission based on voltage source converter," Cigre Conference, Paris, France, pp. 10 1998.

[51] M. Chamia and B. Normark, "An Alternative Means Of Transporting Energy In A Deregulated World," in ABB review, vol. ABB review supplement, 4 1999, pp. 1-13.

[52] D. Jovcic, N. Pahalawaththa, and M. Zavahir, "Inverter Controller For HVDC System Connected To Weak AC System," IEE Proceedings - Generation, Transmission, Distribution, vol. 146, No. 3, pp. 235-240, 1999.

[53] D. N. Kosterev and W. J. Kolodziej, "Bang-Bang Series Capacitor Transient Stability Control," IEEE Transactions on Power Systems, vol. 10, No. 2, pp. 915-924, May 1995.

[54] D. G. Hart, M. Subramanian, D. Novosel, and M. Ingram, "Real-time wide area measurement for adaptive protection and control," NSF/DOE/EPRI Sponsored Workshop on Future Research Directions for Complex Interactive Electric Networks, Washington D.C., pp. 1-7, 16-17 November 2000.

[55] J. F. Christensen, "New control strategies for utilizing power system network more effectively," IFAC/Cigre Symposium, Beijing, China,vol. ELECTRA No. 173, pp. 5-16, August 1997.

[56] H. Ni, G. T. Heydt, and L. Mili, "Power system stability agents using robust wide area control," IEEE Transactions on Power Systems, vol. 17, No. 4, pp. 1123 -1131, November 2002.

[57] J. F. Hauer and C. W. Taylor, "Information, reliability, and control in the new power system," American Control Conference, Philadelphia, PA , USA,vol. 5, pp. 2986-2991, June 1998.

Page 85: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

58

[58] I. Kamwa and R. Grondin, "PMU configuration for system dynamic performance measurement in large, multiarea power systems," IEEE Transactions on Power Systems, vol. 17, No. 2, pp. 385 -394, May 2002.

[59] A. A. Grobovoy, "Russian Far East interconnected power system emergency stability control," IEEE Power Engineering Society Summer Meeting, Vancouver, BC, Canada,vol. 2, pp. 824-829 2001.

[60] C. W. Taylor, "Response-based, Feedforward Wide area control," NSF/DOE/EPRI Sponsored Workshop on Future Research Directions for Complex Interactive Electric Networks, Washington D.C., pp. 1-6, 16-17 November 2000.

[61] D. P. Carroll and C. M. Ong, "Coordinated Power Modulation in Multiterminal HVDC Systems," IEEE Transactions on Power Apparatus and Systems, vol. PAS-100, No. 3, pp. 1351-1361, March 1981.

[62] E. Haryadi, A. S. Sabzevary, and S. Iwamoto, "Robust Stabilizer with GPS for Multimachine oscillation ,," 14th Triennial World Congress,1999, IFAC, Beijing, P.R. China, pp. 237-242 1999.

Page 86: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

59

Chapter 3

Kinetic Energy Reduction for Power

System Stability Design

The key idea in this chapter is to extend the energy function control in [1] to

a complex power system such as a DC link interconnecting two power

systems. This chapter also examines the problem of control chattering while

using a bang-bang control near a stable equilibrium operating condition. The

undesirable result due to this control chattering is described and an effective

switching solution is proposed. A four-machine two-area DC link power

system is used to demonstrate the control design procedure.

A simple saturation function applied to the four-machine two-area power

system shows that a single HVDC controller can be effective in damping

multi-mode oscillations without compromising large signal performance. A

systematic procedure that derives this control law using the nonlinear

structure of energy function based on Lyapunov’s stability criteria is

Page 87: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

60

outlined. It is shown, using this simplified example of the four-machine

two-area interconnected power system, that all oscillations (or modes of

separations) are well damped. In a power system, a good damping

contribution by a particular device to a mode of separation is only possible

if the device controller has strong influence over it.

3.1. Introduction

A power system has non-linear characteristics and will response in

unexpected ways when it is subject to different disturbances. In particular,

different fault locations in a power system may result in different types of

machine angle separations in the power system. In the normal operation of

power system, linearly tuned controllers are effective in damping small

disturbances such as small load changes. However, in contingency planning,

where severe disturbances such as line faults are considered, linear analysis

are generally limited to only few contingencies as discussed in [2]. In a

typical contingency planning exercise, several operating points need to be

considered for each contingency. This cumbersome approach is exacerbated

when most of the contingencies are examined using the time domain

analysis, which is time consuming. A generally robust and non-linear

analysis tool such as the Lyapunov energy function [3, 4] has been used to

supplement contingency analysis by computing stability indices. These

stability indices relieve TNSP companies from the need to determine the

Page 88: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

61

transient stability of a power system from a post-fault time domain

simulation.

This chapter investigates the possibility of using energy functions to derive

a non-linear control law that yields good damping performance. The energy

function control in [1, 5] damps disturbances in a pure AC power system

using series capacitor compensation (SCS). In this chapter, this energy

function based control is extended to the control of a HVDC link in a mixed

AC/DC network. Through the formulation of a HVDC link problem, we

seek a control approach that gives a good reduction of total system energy.

This chapter is organized into three parts. Firstly, a switching control law

based on energy function is derived for a power system consisting of two

AC segments jointed by a DC link. Secondly, an initial condition on a g(x)

surface or switching hyperplane S [5] is used to demonstrate that under the

influence of a signum function (or a bang-bang control), a stable limit cycle

can be formed. The occurrence of the stable limit cycle in this power system

control application can be characterized as a high gain speed feedback

control problem. An example of a dual LC (i.e. inductor-capacitor) circuit is

used to illustrate how switching control can result in the reduction of the

number oscillatory modes. Thirdly, the use of a simple saturation function to

avoid a stable limit cycle and achieve a multi-mode damping via a single

HVDC controller is explained.

Page 89: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

62

3.2. Energy Function Based Switching Control

A simplified structure of a four-machine two-area HVDC linked power

system is shown in Figure 3.1 where the DC link between the two areas is

capable of real power modulation. The sign of the shunt resistor G2 indicates

real power withdrawal or injection between buses 2 and 3. The converter

dynamics and voltage variation at buses 2 and 3 are to be ignored in this

case.

DC Link

2115MW

Small system

Generator 4 Generator 3

3 4 X34=j0.025 1485MW

-G2 m1=1.56 m2=0.922

Generator 2 4454MW

Generator 1

Large system

1 2 X12=j0.008 5049MW

G2 m3=0.315 m4=0.126

Figure 3.1: Single line diagram of a four-machine two-area power system.

The sets of swing equations for the power system in Figure 3.1 is

−−−−−=

−−−−=

121212112

212112222

2222

11121221

121221112

1111

sin

cos

sin

cos

dccoa

m

coa

m

PmPbvv

gvvgvPm

mPbvv

gvvgvPm

δδδ

δδδ

&&

&&

Page 90: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

63

−−−−=

+−−−−=

42434334

434334442

4444

232343443

343443332

3333

sincos

sincos

mPbvvgvvgvPm

PmPbvvgvvgvPm

coa

m

dccoa

m

δδδ

δδδ

&&

&&

(3.1)

o

o

o

o

ωωδ

ωωδ

ωωδ

ωωδ

−=

−=

−=

−=

44

33

22

11

&

&

&

&

where

• Pcoa1 and Pcoa2 are the perfect governor terms of the large and small

power systems interconnected via a DC link,

• all δδ &&& , and ω are the respective machine angular acceleration, machine

angle and machine angular velocity in an inertial frame,

• Pmi is the ith machine mechanical power,

• vi is the ith bus voltage,

• mi is the ith machine inertial constant,

• δij is the angle difference between the ith and jth buses,

• g is the shunt conductance element of reduced Y admittance matrix [6],

• b is the transfer admittance element of reduced Y admittance matrix

and

• Pdc is the simple representation of DC power transfer across a DC link.

The perfect governor term (Pcoa) is expressed as

43

243432

21

121211

mmPPPPP

P

mmPPPPP

P

dceemmcoa

dceemmcoa

++−−+

=

+−−−+

=

(3.2)

where Pe is the electrical power of a machine and the remaining parameters

have been defined earlier in association with (3.1).

Page 91: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

64

The purposes of including perfect governor terms [5, 7, 8] for each

generators is to ensure that the sets of swing equations (3.1) focus on angle

differences and neglect the governor dynamic in a power system during the

analysis. Under the assumption of perfect governors’ action, all angles are

identical to measurements as referenced to a centre-of-area (COA) frame.

The Pdc1 and Pdc2 terms in (3.2) are the steady state real powers drawn or

injected at bus 2 and 3 respectively through the shunt resistor G2. Pdc1 and

Pdc2 are calculated from

22GvP idc = (3.3)

where vi is the corresponding bus voltage.

The energy function V [3] of the power system in Figure 3.1 can be written

in the form

0

)()(

cos

cos

)cos(cos

)cos(cos

))((21

332221

4

1

4

3

2

1

2

1

4

1

4

3

2

1

2

1

4

1

24

1

2

=

−−−+

∑ ∫∑+

∑ ∫∑+

∑ −∑−

∑ −∑−

∑ −−−∑

=

=

+=

=

=

+=

=

=

+=

=

=

=

+=

=

=

=

=

=

=

sdc

sdc

n

ijijijji

n

i

n

ijijijji

n

i

n

ij

sijijijji

n

i

n

ij

sijijijji

n

i

n

i

siiiiimi

n

iii

PP

gvv

gvv

bvv

bvv

gvPm

V

δδδδ

δ

δ

δδ

δδ

δδω

(3.4)

Page 92: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

65

The derivative of (3.4) is expressed as

( )∑ ++−==

n

iiiimiiii fgvPmV

1

2 )(δδδ &&&& (3.5)

where f(δ) is a function of δ.

Assuming that all bus voltages vi and vj are 1.0 p.u. and the switching in and

out of G2 has resulted in a real power modulation between the two areas, an

admittance matrix Yactual [1] for the switching of G2 in the network is

outin

outactual

YYYYUYY

−=∆∆+= *

(3.6)

where the terms Yin and Yout represent the network admittance matrix when

G2 is switched in and out respectively. U is a switching input and Y∆ is the

change in the network admittance matrix

−=

−−

−−

−−+−

+−−

=∆

00000000000000

0000

0000

0000

0000

2

2

4443

3433

2221

1211

4443

34332

22221

1211

GG

YYYY

YYYY

YYYYG

YGYYY

Y

Substituting (3.6) into (3.1), the first four equations in (3.1) can be rewritten

as (3.7) based on the assumption that all bus voltages vi and vj are 1.0 p.u.

Page 93: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

66

( ) ( )( )

( ) ( )( )

( ) ( )( )

( ) ( )( )

−∆+−∆+−∆+−

=

+−∆+−∆+−∆+−

=

−−∆+−∆+−∆+−

=

−∆+−

∆+−∆+−=

2434343

4343434444444

22343434

3434343333333

11212121

2121212222222

1121212

1212121111111

sin*

cos**

sin*

cos**

sin*

cos**

sin*

cos**

coa

m

dccoa

m

dccoa

m

coa

m

Pbub

guggugPm

PPbub

guggugPm

PPbub

guggugPm

Pbub

guggugPm

δδ

δ

δδ

δ

δδ

δ

δ

δδ

&&

&&

&&

&&

(3.7)

Substituting (3.7) into the rate of change of energy function V& (3.5) and

considering only the controllable terms in the equation, the simplified V&

reduces to

( ) ( )( ) ( )

∆+∆+∆+∆+

∆+∆+∆+∆+

∆+∆+∆+∆

−=

4343434343

2121212121

444333222111

bgbg

bgbg

gggg

uV

δδ

δδ

δδδδ

&&

&&

&&&&

& (3.8)

Since all the elements in Y∆ in (3.6) are zero except for the 22g∆ and 33g∆

elements, the rate of change of energy function V& is simplified further into

−−= 322

~~δδ &&& uGV (3.9)

where the speed iδ~& is measured in the COA frame. The conversion from

inertial frame to the COA frame is evaluated from the expression

COAii δδδ &&& −=~

where iδ& is in inertia frame and ∑

∑=

=

=x

jj

x

iii

COAm

m

1

δ

&& .

Page 94: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

67

Similarly, the conversion of machine angle iδ in inertia frame to the COA

frame is via the expression

COAii δδδ −=~

where ∑

∑=

=

=x

jj

x

iii

COAm

m

1

δ .

The control law in (3.10) is selected based on (3.9) to keep the derivative of

energy V& most negative. This aims to satisfy the necessary condition of

Lyapunov stability [5] for asymptotic stability such that when a Lyapunov

function V is positive definite and a Lyapunov function derivative V& is

negative semi-definite, a system trajectory is forced towards a stable

equilibrium operating condition asymptotically. A control law that makes

maximum contribution to a non-divergent system trajectory is

=<−

>==

0 0 for S 0 1 for S

0 1 for S Usgn(S) andU (3.10)

where S is the switching hyperplane in (3.11) or a g(x) surface [5]. It should

be noted that the speed measurement 2~δ& and 3

~δ& in (3.9) refer to the large

and small power systems centre of area (COA) respectively.

0~~

32 =−= δδ &&S (3.11)

Page 95: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

68

The COAs for the small (COAS) and large (COAL) area are evaluated using

the expression

=

== 2

1

2

1

jj

iii

COA

m

m

S

δδ and

=

== 4

3

4

3

jj

iii

COA

m

m

L

δδ

For simplicity, the “~” notation that represents the machine angle and speed

in COA frame (i.e. iδ~

and iδ~& ) will be dropped in the following sections.

Instead both iδ and iδ& would simply refer to the machine angle and speed

measured in COA frame.

3.3. Signum Function (Bang-bang Control)

The control law derived in (3.10) is a bang-bang control [1, 5] and is

referred to as a signum function. As large disturbances occur in the four-

machine two-area power system in Figure 3.1, a bang-bang controller is

desirable as the control switches between its upper and lower limits to give

maximum available influence. This result is shown in Figure 3.2.

It is expected from observing Figure 3.2 that the continuous oscillations

after t=4s will be damped only by machine damper windings.

Page 96: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

69

Figure 3.2: The response of machine speeds. Due to the bang-bang control,

continuous oscillations are formed.

Figure 3.3: The system response is kept on a switching hyperplane S beyond

3.5 seconds effectively resulting in zero control.

0 2 4 6 8 - 6

- 4

- 2

0

2

4

6

Time (sec.)

S=pd2

- pd3

0

2

4

6

8

10- 6

- 4

- 2

0

2

4

6

S= 32 δδ && −

Switc

hing

hyp

erpl

ane

S

0 2 4 6 8 1-8

-6

-4

-2

2

4

6

8

Time (sec.)

pd

pd

pd

pd

0 2 4 6 8 10-8

-6

-4

-2

0

2

4

6

8

Rat

e of

cha

nge

of m

achi

ne a

ngle

1δ&

2δ&

3δ&

4δ&

Page 97: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

70

An examination of the switching hyperplane diagram in Figure 3.3 suggests

that during the period between t=0 to t=3.5 seconds, the system trajectory

does not remain on the switching hyperplane S, it reaches and leaves the

hyperplane S. During this duration, the control effort is insufficiently strong

to keep the system trajectory on the hyperplane S. Beyond 3.5 seconds, a

bang-bang switching control effort has sufficient strength to hold a system

trajectory on a switching hyperplane S as machine speeds approach zero. As

machine speeds approaches zero, the signal ( 32 δδ && − ) would be close to

zero and the control U would chatter between its +1 and –1 limits when the

signal 32 δδ && − changes sign. This chattering of U effectively results in zero

damping of some modes of the system. This agrees with the discussion in

[5] that when a system trajectory reaches and stays on a g(x) surface at a

point where it is not a stable operating condition, it oscillates continuously

on the surface.

From the total kinetic energy diagram in Figure 3.4, residue kinetic energy

can be observed in the power system. Correlating this observation with that

of Figure 3.3, it is understandable that continuous oscillations are possible

as there is still energy in the power system. From an energy perspective,

when an unforced and undamped power system has a solution that is not at

velocity origin, it will have a constant energy leading to a system trajectory

which follows a closed orbit inside a separatrix [7, page 110] defined as the

boundary of instability in phase plane. This non-system solution [7, page27]

resembles a continuous oscillation. Since the power system in Figure 3.1 did

Page 98: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

71

not incorporate the effect of damper winding and it has effectively zero

control damping owing to the chattering of U beyond 3.5 seconds, it is non-

divergent inside a separatrix. However, the system operates in a limit cycle.

This is clear as seen in Figure 3.4 that the constant oscillation of kinetic

energy corresponds to a constant value of total energy.

Figure 3.4: The Remaining total kinetic energy in the power system results

in continuous oscillations.

In the next section, feedback control theory is used to characterize the cause

of a limit cycle in a power system under the influence of a bang-bang

control.

0 2 4 6 8 10

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

1

t

Vke1 + Vke2 + Vke3 + Vke4

0 2 4 6 8 100

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Time (sec.)

Tot

al K

inet

ic e

nerg

y

(Vke

1 +

Vke

2 +

Vke

3 +

Vke

4)

Vke1 + Vke2 + Vke3 + Vke4

Page 99: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

72

3.3.1. A High Gain Feedback Control Problem

An alternative explanation for the occurrence of a limit cycle or a

continuous oscillation on a g(x) surface can be given by considering a high

gain feedback control problem using Root Locus analysis.

The power system in Figure 3.1 is first linearised to the form of

CxyBuAxx

=+=&

(3.12)

where A and x are the respective system matrix and states vector

respectively.

Vectors B and C are constructed by considering (3.1), (3.6) and (3.7), where

all bus voltages are assumed to be 1.0 p.u.

[ ]00000110

00000

0

0000

3

33

2

22

4

434344

3

343433

2

212122

1

121211

−=

∆−

∆−

=

∆−∆−∆−

∆−∆−∆−

∆−∆−∆−

∆−∆−∆−

=

C

mg

mg

mbgg

mbgg

mbgg

mbgg

B (3.13)

where iig∆ and ijg∆ are elements of the change in admittance matrix Y∆

which have been defined earlier in association with (3.6).

Page 100: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

73

A Root Locus analysis that examines the characteristic equation in (3.14)

considers various gains represented by the notation K from 0 to infinity.

0)(1 =+ SKG (3.14)

where G(s) is an open loop transfer function.

A general unity negative feedback diagram is shown in Figure 3.5. This

corresponds to a control equation U(s) in the form of

)()( sKzsU = (3.15)

where function z(s) resemble the feedback signal of )( 32 δδ && − obtained from

(3.9). For simplicity, the notations U(s) and z(s) are referred in the following

sections as U and z.

Figure 3.5: A general negative feedback transfer function blocks.

If U is to remain bounded as K approaches infinity, all closed loop poles

would move from its open loop pole position towards the open loop zeros.

Using velocity feedback, all open loop zeros are on the j? axis and as K

approaches infinity the closed loop responses become undamped since all

closed loop poles have moved to the open loop zeros on the j? axis. This

will result in continuous oscillations. The movement of closed loop poles,

K Y(s)

U(s)z (s)R(s)=0C

G(s)

BuAx x& = BuAx = BuAx = K Y(s)

U(s)z (s)R(s)=0_ C

G(s)

++

Page 101: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

74

when gain K increases, is shown in Figure 3.6. In Root Locus analysis, the

angle of departure from an eigenvalue refers to the direction of movement

of the eigenvalue as gain K increases from 0. This information is useful as it

determines if a feedback control is divergent or non-divergent.

The angle of departure iϕ (3.18) of every closed loop poles, it is noted that

such control yields non-divergent system responses

180aa pzi −∑−∑=ϕ (3.16)

where αz is the angle from the ith closed loop pole of interest to all of the

finite zeros and αp is the angle from the ith closed loop pole of interest to the

rest of the closed loop poles. A Root Locus diagram in Figure 3.6 shows the

non-divergent system modes for the linearized system described under the

influence of the control U.

Figure 3.6: A Root Locus diagram showing a non-divergent control effect.

- 2 -1.5 -1 -0.5 0 0.5 1-20

-15

-10

-5

0

5

10

15

20

Imag

Axi

s

real axis- 2 -1.5 -1 -0.5 0 0.5 1

-20

-15

-10

-5

0

5

10

15

20

Imag

Axi

s

real axis

Four common mode poles and three finite zeros are located near origin.

One common mode pole approaches the infinity zero as gain K increases to infinity.

Page 102: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

75

For this system, similarities are found between the high gain feedback

control problem and the bang-bang control problem, in particular, these

control problems lead to a non-divergent system trajectory. As the state

feedback signal z in (3.15) is based on ( )32 δδ && − which is similar to the

switching surface 32 δδ && −=S in (3.11), when the system response of the

linearized system described by (3.12) and (3.15) is undamped as gain K

approaches to infinity, this implies that the signum (or bang-bang function)

resembles an infinite gain feedback control. This also implies that the

system trajectory that is kept on the g(x) surface by the bang-bang control

represents an infinite gain feedback control. These relation characterize a

bang-bang control (or signum function) using a high gain feedback control

problem. It is reiterated that using a signum function corresponds to using a

feedback control with infinite gain as the system trajectory converges.

3.3.2. Reducing the Number of Mode by Switching Control

In this section, we propose a simple dual LC example [5] to substantiate that

(i) a bang-bang switching control has a mode reduction ability and, (ii) the

oscillation frequency of a limit cycle is the frequency of a remaining mode

which is also the frequency of an open loop zeros on j? axis. By virtue of

the above (ii), we can further support our earlier statement to characterise

bang-bang control using a high gain feedback control problem.

Page 103: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

76

Figure 3.7 shows a simple dual LC circuit where U is a reversible control

voltage v1 and v2 are the capacitor 1 and 2's pre-charged voltages

respectively.

Figure 3.7: A dual LC circuit with a control voltage V.

The state equations for Figure 3.7 is

+

=

00

1

1

001

0

0001

1000

01

00

2

1

2

1

2

1

2

1

2

1

2

1

2

1

L

L

U

VVII

C

C

L

L

VVII

&&&&

(3.17)

From the sum of the capacitor energy )21

( 2CV and inductor energy

)21

( 2LI , the rate of change of total energy W& in the circuit after

substituting relevant terms from (3.17) yields

I1

L1 L2

C2I2 C1

v2U v1

Page 104: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

77

)( )()(

21

222111222111

2221112211

222111222111

IIUIILIILILUIILUI

IILIILVIVI

IILIILVVCVVCW

+=++−+−=

+++=

+++=

&&&&

&&

&&&&&

(3.18)

The derived bang-bang control law is

)sgn( 21 IIU +−= (3.19)

and the switching surface S is

21 IIS += (3.20)

A Root Locus analysis on the dual LC system in Figure 3.7 showed that (i)

two oscillatory modes exist, and (ii) under a high gain feedback control, one

mode is damped while the other ends up at the open loop zeros on j? axis

as the power system converges. The zeros of the G(s) function are located

approximately at (0, ± j16.0357) as shown in Figure 3.6.

The remaining mode is compared with a time domain solution under a bang-

bang control and a limit cycle is observed in Figure 3.8. It is noted that the

continuous oscillation has a resonance frequency of 16.1 rad/sec which

approximates the frequency of the remaining mode at ± j16.0357 rad/sec.

This reaffirm our earlier assertation that a bang-bang control can be

described by a high gain feedback control problem.

Page 105: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

78

Figure 3.8: Under a bang-bang control, the capacitor voltages of dual LC

circuit has one remaining mode undamped.

3.3.3. Location of Zeros and Bang-bang Control

A Root Locus analysis of the characteristic equation (3.14) shows that root

loci are traced by considering the responses of transfer function G(s) in

Figure 3.5. When K= 0, the roots of the characteristic equation (3.14) give

the poles of G(s) and when K= ∞ , the roots are the zeros of G(s). This

implies that the location of open loop zeros depends on the G(s) function

and a bang-bang control simply forces the open loop poles to the open loop

zeros, as discussed in the earlier sections.

We compare the switching equations in (3.11) of the two-area DC link

power system with that of the dual LC circuit in (3.21) and understand that

0

2

4

6

8

10

- 20

- 15

- 10

- 5

0

5

10

15

20

V1 V2

0

2

4

6

8

10

- 20

- 15

- 10

- 5

0

5

10

15

20

Time (sec.)

V1 V2

Cap

acito

r vol

tage

(v 1

and

v2)

Page 106: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

79

both switching equations contain only velocity terms. It is noted that any

velocity based control law with poles on j? axis will give rise to zeros on

j? axis. This is evident from the Root Locus diagram (Figure 3.6) of the

linearized power system represented by equation (3.12 - 3.13).

21 qqS && += (3.21)

Equation (3.21) is written in a velocity form by considering the initial

capacitor charges (q1, q2) and current ( 21 qq && + ) as the respective position

and velocity states.

3.4. Exponential Convergence Introduced by a

Saturation Function

A 'full region' switching function or simply a saturation function is proposed

to yield a system converging behaviour and the derivation of the saturation

function will be described in the following paragraphs.

An inspection of the Root Locus diagram in Figure 3.6 shows that if a finite

gain K is used in a control design instead of an infinite gain K, system poles

will be damped at some damping factor. This leads to the use of a 'full

region' control law that allows switching inside both non-linear and linear

regions (i.e. 11 +≥≥− U and 11 +>>− U ) which would result in the

Page 107: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

80

respective infinite gain switching and finite gain switching at appropriate

instances. Such control law is known as a saturation function and it has the

capability to remove the remaining energy in the power system as noted in

Figure 3.4. The control law based on a saturation function is

<≤≤

>==

-1 S -1 for 1S 1 S for -

1 1 for S Usat(S) andU (3.22)

where S is the same switching hyperplane or g(x) surface as derived in

(3.11).

The responses of the power system in Figure 3.1 under the influence of the

saturation function control law in equation (3.22) are shown in Figure 3.9,

3.10 and 3.11. The behaviour of the finite time convergence owing to the

switching in a non-linear region and the exponential convergence due to the

switching in a linear region can be observed from the machine speed (Figure

3.9) and the kinetic energy (Figure 3.11) diagrams.

Comparing Figure 3.2 and 3.9, their differences are explained in the

following paragraphs. The reasons for the state convergence in Figure 3.9

can be summarised as: (i) from a Root Locus analysis in Figure 3.6 a gain K

of 1 introduces approximately a system-damping factor of 0.07 in the large

power system and a 0.05 system damping factor in the small power system.

This guarantees an exponentially converging system states when switching

in a linear region (i.e. 11 +>>− U ), (ii) in energy context, equation (3.9)

and (3.10) describe the rate of dissipation of energy which guarantee a finite

Page 108: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

81

time convergence of system states in a non-linear region, and (iii) when the

control effort U no longer switches when operating in the linear region, the

system trajectory will continue to intersect with closed orbits inside a

separatrix of an unforced power system towards an origin.

Figure 3.9: The machine speeds converge owing to the soft switching in

linear region.

The control based on the saturation function in equation (3.22) is shown in

Figure 3.12. It is observed that the saturation function approximates a bang-

bang control before t=3 seconds giving rise to a finite time convergence of

system states towards the S=0 surface. Then the control leaves saturation

and becomes linear resulting in the exponential convergence of system

states.

0 2 4 6 8 10-8

-6

-4

-2

0

2

4

6

8

t

pd pd pd pd

4

0 2 4 6 8 10- 8

- 6

- 4

- 2

0

2

4

6

8

Time (sec.)

Rat

e of

cha

nge

of m

achi

ne a

ngle

1δ&

2δ&

3δ&

4δ&

Page 109: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

82

Figure 3.10: The system responses decay exponentially near an origin as the

continuos control in the linear region dominates.

Figure 3.11: The total kinetic energy converges exponentially towards an

origin reaching the system solution.

0 2 4 6 8 10

-6

-4

-2

0

2

4

6

S=pd2

-pd3

Exponentially decaying signal.

0 2 4 6 8 10-6

-4

-2

0

2

4

6

S= 32 δδ && − -

Exponentially decaying signal. Switc

hing

hyp

erpl

ane

S

Time (sec)

0 2 4 6 8 1

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

1

Vke1 + Vke2 + Vke3 + Vke4

Exponentially decaying energy

0 2 4 6 8 100

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

1

Tot

al k

inet

ic e

nerg

y V

ke Vke1 + Vke2 + Vke3 + Vke4

Exponentially decaying energy

Time (sec)

Page 110: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

83

Figure 3.12: The energy based control that uses the saturation function

control law.

3.5. Conclusion

A full region switching control function or a saturation function that is

derived based on energy function and the Lyapunov’s stability criteria is

proposed and verified on a four-machine two-area HVDC link power

system in Figure 3.1. A saturation function is also tested on a dual LC

circuit and system convergence is being achieved. The possibility of

multimode damping using a single HVDC controller to achieve

multimachine stability has thus been addressed.

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 -1

-0.8

-0.6

-0.4

-0.2

0

0.2

0.4

0.6

0.8

1

Time (sec.)

Con

trol

U (b

ased

on

satu

ratio

n fu

nctio

n)

Page 111: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

84

Traditionally, HVDC link is only used for control when it is directly

installed in parallel with AC lines. This chapter shows that one HVDC link

can rapidly reduce the oscillation energy injected into the power system

during a fault damping several modes. In general, it is expected in a power

system that oscillation modes receive good damping if the controller has

strong influence over them.

The bang-bang control characterised by a high gain velocity feedback

control problem is different from a sliding mode control. In this aspect, we

see similarity such that both types of switching action tend to attract a

system trajectory to a switching line. In the case of sliding mode control [9],

large control rating is required to attract a system trajectory to a switching

surface and hold it onto the switching surface (or a sliding surface). The

sliding mode control ensures that the system trajectory on the sliding surface

slides towards an origin exponentially and the rate of sliding motion

depends on a sliding equation. In general, a sliding mode control is a high

gain control system that can be designed to introduce system stability in a

system of any order. The proposed bang-bang control derived from the total

energy function approach does not use large control rating as in the sliding

mode control case to attract the system trajectory towards the switching line

keeping the system trajectory on the switching line. Instead, this proposed

bang-bang control drives the system trajectory towards the switching line

letting it passes the switching line in response to switching between control

limits. This is observed from the system response in Figure 3.3. The effect

Page 112: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

85

of this bang-bang control based on total energy function approach has the

effect of finite time reduction in kinetic energy. In general, high gain control

such as the bang-bang control derived from total energy approach is capable

of introducing system stability to a system of any order provided at fault

clearing the system trajectory lies inside the separatrix of the system [7,

page 110]. However, the ability of a sliding mode control to introduce

system stability to a system of any order depends on the ability of the

control to attract the system trajectory to the switching line. With regards to

the implementation of high gain control in high order system, this is not the

interest of study in this thesis. However, the proposed total energy function

approach in switching control application does not have difficulty in its

implementation in high order system. The issue being discussed is in

relation to the use of high gain feedback control to characterize a bang-bang

control in order to resolve the issue of control chattering near a stable

equilibrium point. The consequence of control chattering with respect to the

control damping introduced in the system is an effectively zero control

damping being introduced. Through the understanding of a simple

linearized high gain feedback control problem, the bang-bang switching

function is replaced by a saturation switching function to allow finite gain

switching near a stable equilibrium point. This saturation switching function

resolves the issue of control chattering near a stable equilibrium point which

is approximated as the region of the non-linear system. In general, the

proposed energy function control based on a saturation function

approximates a bang-bang control and provides continuous control value in

Page 113: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

86

a linear region preventing a system trajectory from being kept on a

switching surface near a stable equilibrium point (or a linear region).

The control design based on energy function is outlined and extended to the

control of a HVDC link power system which is also applicable to the control

of Flexible AC Transmission (FACT) devices such as a Static Var

Compensator (SVC). The proposed saturation function overcomes the

deficiencies in a linearly design controller. It is evident that for a linearly

tuned controller, it will experience unanticipated performance during severe

disturbances and underperforms when it saturates. When an energy function

control design uses a saturation function instead of a signum function, the

benefit of the maximum energy reduction obtained from a velocity based

bang-bang control is being retained and the problem of control chattering

near a stable equilibrium operating condition has been mitigated.

Page 114: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

87

3.6. References

[1] G. Ledwich, J. Fernandez-Vargas, and X. Yu, "Switching Control of Multi-machine Power Systems," IEEE / KTH Stockholm Power Tech Conference, Stockholm, Sweden, pp. 138-142, June 1995.

[2] C. Taylor, "Advanced Angle Stability Controls," Cigre Technical Brochure Cigre TF38.02.17, No. 155, pp. 2-2 to 2-8, April 2000.

[3] M. A. Pai, Energy Function Analysis For Power System Stability: Kluwer Academic Publishers, 1989.

[4] H. D. Chiang, C.-C. Chu, and G. Cauley, "Direct Stability Analysis of Electric Power Systems Using Energy Functions: Theory, Applications, and Perspective," Proceedings of the IEEE, vol. 83, No. 11, pp. 1497-1528, November 1995.

[5] E. W. Palmer, "Multi-Mode Damping of Power System Oscillations," PhD thesis in Electrical and Computer Engineering The University of Newcastle, 1998, pp. 196.

[6] K. Prabhashankar and W. Janischewsyj, "Digital Simulation of multimachine Power Systems for Stability Studies," IEEE Transactions on Power Apparatus and Systems, vol. PAS-87, No. 1, pp. 73-80, January 1968.

[7] M. A. Pai, Power System Stability - Analysis by the Direct Method of Lyapunov, vol. 3: North-Holland Publishing Company, 1981.

[8] G. Ledwich and E. Palmer, "Energy Function For Power Systems with Transmission Losses," IEEE Transactions on Power Systems, vol. 12, No. 2, pp. 785-790, May 1997.

[9] M. V. D. Wal, B. D. Jager, and F. Veldpaus, "The slippery road to sliding control: conventional versus dynamical sliding mode control," International Journal of Robust and Nonlinear Control, vol. 8, pp. 535-549, 1998.

Page 115: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

88

This page is intentionally left blank.

Page 116: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

89

Chapter 4

Weighted Energy Control

The energy function based control aims at maximizing the rate of reduction

of disturbance energy. The saturation function introduced in the earlier

chapter approximates a bang-bang control and yields at lease exponential

damping modes near a stable equilibrium operating condition. In a power

system, there are hundreds of strong and weak links and the power system

could separate anyway in the transmission network. In over the total set of

disturbances, separations at weak links are more likely to occur than at the

strong links but the total energy function does not differentiate that. In

control application, this total energy approach underperforms when it comes

to preventing a power system separation at a weak link at first swing. In this

chapter, the strong and weak area operating conditions in a large power

system is introduced to emphasize the relationship between transient

stability limits and the weak area of a power system.

Page 117: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

90

One of the major limitations of energy function based control is the control

direction that targets on the portion of the system with greatest disturbance

energy instead of the area with the highest probability of separation. In this

thesis, the term “power system separation” refers to two coherent groups of

generators that separate from each other resulting in system instability.

4.1. Introduction

The energy function based control introduced in the earlier chapter yielded

appropriate control directions for the control of a two area DC link power

system. One of the major deficiencies of the energy function based control

arises from the emphasis of its control directions on the area with the

highest disturbance energy, which is undesirable from the strong and weak

areas perspective. It is understandable from a practical aspect that the

strong and weak areas in a two-area DC linked power system have different

transient stability limits; the weaker area has a lower stability limit owing to

its higher network reactance. When we consider the two-area DC link power

system as one large power system, it is apparent that severe disturbances on

a g(x) surface may introduce different disturbance energy in these two areas,

with the larger area having higher disturbance energy than the smaller area

since the larger area has a higher aggregated inertia constant. Although

disturbance energy in the smaller area is low, it may be dangerously close to

its low transient stability limit. This becomes an obvious control problem

Page 118: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

91

when a power system is on the verge of separating into two coherent groups

of generators. Hence it is desirable to have a control that is capable of

recognizing both the strong and weak areas circumstances and directs the

correct control efforts to these areas that are in need of it.

4.2. Looking at a Two-area Energy Problems

The two-area DC link power system as shown in Figure 4.1 is used as an

intuitive example to demonstrate the strong and weak areas case in a large

power system.

Figure 4.1: Single line diagram of a four-machine two-area system

A simplified process of deriving energy function based control law using

only total kinetic energy instead of an energy function [1] is proposed.

m2=0.922

2 3 5 4

m1=1.5

1 j0.01 j0.0144 j0.0016

j0.016

j0.01

m4=0.922

2 3 5 4

m3=1.56

1 j0.01 j0.095 j0.045

j0.05

j0.01

DC Link G2

-G2

Generator 1Pm1=20p.u.

Generator 2Pm2=5p.u.

Generator 3Pm3=8p.u.

Generator 4Pm4=2p.u.

Large system (area 1)

Small system (area 2)

Page 119: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

92

A total kinetic energy for the power system is in the form

∑==

=

4

1

2

21 n

iiike mV δ& (4.1)

where n is the number of machines, m is machine inertia constant and δ& is

machine angular velocity.

Taking the derivative of the total kinetic energy keV , we obtained keV& as in

(4.2). Equation (4.2) has a similar switching surface (or controllable terms)

compared to the derivative of energy function V& introduced in the earlier

chapter.

( )

∆−∆−∆−∆−

−−−−

+++−+

=

∑==

=

)()()()(

)()()()(

)()()()(

44332211

44332211

44332211

4

1

eeee

eeee

mdcmdcmm

n

iiiike

PPPPU

PPPP

PPPPPP

mV

δδδδ

δδδδ

δδδδ

δδ

&&&&

&&&&

&&&&

&&&&

(4.2)

∆+∆+

∆+∆+

∆+∆+

∆+∆+

∆+∆+∆+∆

−=

4343434343

2121212121

4343434343

2121212121

444333222111

sinsin

sinsin

coscos

coscos

),(

δδδδ

δδδδ

δδδδ

δδδδ

δδδδ

δδ

bb

bb

gg

gg

gggg

U

f

&&

&&

&&

&&

&&&&

&

SUf

Ugf

*),(

),(),(

−=

−=

δδ

δδδδ&

&&

where

Page 120: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

93

• Pe is the machine electrical power output

∑ ∑=

=

=

≠=

++=4

1

4

1

))cossin(n

i

n

ij

ijijijijiiei gbgP δδ ,

• ∆Pe is the change in machine electrical power output due to the power

modulation in the network caused by the DC link

∑ ∑=

=

=

≠=

∆+∆+∆=∆4

1

4

1

))cossin(n

i

n

ij

ijijijijiiei gbgP δδ ,

• ),( δδ&gS = is the switching surface and

• U is the control effort that switches between the 1± limits.

Examining (4.2), when the power system in Figure 4.1 has no control (i.e.

U=0) and is operating at a SEP as defined in Chapter 2, the sum of machine

speeds is zero since the power supplies (Pmi) equals the power demands

(Pei±Pdc) in both areas. This results in 0=keV& in the large power system. At

post-fault when the operating point is deviated from the SEP causing the

changes in generator’ electrical power from Pei to Pei*, the aim of U is to

introduce changes in the network electrical power (∆Pei) to minimize Pei*

and reduce keV& . This leads to the derivation of the control law that keeps the

keV& most negative.

The derived bang-bang control law becomes

=<−

>==

for S for S for S

(S) and UU0001

01sgn (4.3)

Page 121: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

94

The total kinetic energy equation (4.1) describes the two areas’ energy

problem and its derivative (4.2) indicates that the direction of the control

effort is determined by the dependant terms associated with area 1 and 2’s

machine angular velocity ( 21 and δδ && ) and ( 43 and δδ && ) respectively. From

these dependant terms, it is possible to identify the energy associated with

each of the area and it becomes feasible to weight between the two areas in

terms of their energy. Hence the weighted energy control is

++−+

++

++−+

+

=

∆∆

∆∆

∆∆

∆∆

)(cos)(sin*

)(cos)(sin*

sgn

431212431212

444333

211212211212

222111

δδδδδδ

δδ

δδδδδδ

δδ

&&&&

&&

&&&&

&&

GB

GGwtB

GB

GGwtA

U (4.4)

where wtA and wtB are the respective weighting factor for area 1 and area

2.

The evaluation of an area’s weighting factor is based on the concept of UEP

and this will be discussed in the following section.

Page 122: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

95

4.3. A Proximity to Separation Weighting Based on

UEP

An Unstable Equilibrium Point (UEP) [2] describes the transient instability

of an area and in the above two-area DC link problem (Figure 4.1), there is

only one UEP in each area as a two-machine configuration leads to only one

type of power system separation.

A two-machine system can be made equivalent to a Single-Machine-

Infinite-Bus (SMIB) system and an approximated UEP for each area is

evaluated using the expression of

)( si pUEP δ−= (4.5)

where sδ is a stable operating angle difference between two machines

obtained from a loadflow solution and UEPi refers to the ith area’s UEP.

A centre of area (COA) [3] angle frame is used in this two-machine power

system representing an area and the COA angle coaδ for each area is

evaluated using the expression of

)( 21

2211mmmm

coa ++

=δδ

δ (4.6)

where mi and iδ refers to the ith machine inertia constant and angle

respectively.

Page 123: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

96

Substituting (4.5) into (4.6), the approximated UEP ),( 21uu δδ referenced to

the COA is

2112

12211

/

/)(

mm

mm

uu

su

δδ

δπδ

−=

−= (4.7)

The energy evaluated at a UEP is the critical energy [4] of a power system

separation. As each area has one UEP that describes the power system

separation at the area, the proximity to this unique critical energy will yield

a warning indicator for each area.

(t)-VVindex

(t)-VVindex

arae23uepB

arae12uepA

2

1

=

= (4.8)

where both uepV12 and uepV34 are energy evaluated at the UEP of area 1

and area 2 respectively.

A dynamic weighting approach that is suitable for a two-area energy

problem in (4.4) is

1)index20*exp(wtB1)index20*exp(wtA

B

A

+−=+−=

(4.9)

These exponential weighting factors flexibly direct the control in (4.4) when

the power system in Figure 4.1 is close to separation in an area.

From Figure 4.2, it is apparent that placing a higher weighting on a

vulnerable area has significant advantages as the control is directed to keep

Page 124: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

97

both areas synchronized and prevented the power system separation in area

2 around 0.25s where disturbances on a g(x) surface are examined. The

disturbances on a g(x) resemble the occurrence of disturbances in both the

large and small areas. The control in equation (4.4) is based heavily on area

2’s disturbance energy in the form of 43 and δδ && oscillations.

Figure 4.2: Control effort directed to save area 2 from separation around

0.25s.

The dynamic weightings for the two areas are shown in Figure 4.3. The

weighting of area 2 outweighs that of area 1 at the first swing near 0.25s

when area 2 is close to separation. As area 2 becomes no longer in risk of

separating, its weighting reduces significantly.

0 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 3

-6

-4

-2

0

2

4

Time (sec.)

Effect of weighted bang-bang control1δ&2δ&

3δ&

4δ&

Mac

hine

ang

ular

vel

ocity

Page 125: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

98

Figure 4.3: Weightings of the two areas that indicate the high risk separation

in the area.

4.4. Conclusion

An energy function based control law has a switching surface S that is

similar to that of a total kinetic energy function control. This significantly

simplifies the process of formulating a V function and deriving a V& control

law that yields stable results.

The large and small area scenario mentioned in this chapter is common in a

large power system. The proposed idea of weighted energy control is

attractive as it emphasizes the probability of separation instead of the size of

disturbance energy. It is clear that when a control uses the size of

0 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 30

20

40

60

80

100

120

140

160

180

200

Time (sec.)

Response of weighting factors in the two

Area 1 weightingArea 2 weighting

Wei

ghtin

gs

Page 126: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

99

disturbance energy as the main determining factor for its control direction,

the weak area is often neglected during the first swing. Using a two-area

power system with each area represented by a two-machine system, the

weighting of energy based control is obvious since each area has only one

UEP. In each area, the comparison between the post-fault energy and the

critical energy evaluated at respective UEPs give rise to a proximity-to-

separation indicator that can be used to redirect control to a weak area at the

first swing. This increases the chance of survival in a weak area.

When it is required to consider the effect of machine interactions (or area

interactions) in a large power system during the transient period, a multiple

machines model is used instead of aggregated machines in the power

system. In a multi-machine power system, there are various ways the power

system can be separated hence several UEPs must be considered. This

complicates the use of weighted energy control in a multiple UEPs

environment and a control approach that identifies this multiple separation

situation is required. The extension of weighted energy control will be

discussed in the later chapter.

Page 127: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

100

4.5. References

[1] M. A. Pai, Energy Function Analysis For Power System Stability: Kluwer Academic Publishers, 1989.

[2] H. D. Chiang, C.-C. Chu, and G. Cauley, "Direct Stability Analysis of Electric Power Systems Using Energy Functions: Theory, Applications, and Perspective," Proceedings of the IEEE, vol. 83, No. 11, pp. 1497-1528, November 1995.

[3] G. Ledwich and E. Palmer, "Energy Function For Power Systems with Transmission Losses," IEEE Transactions on Power Systems, vol. 12, No. 2, pp. 785-790, May 1997.

[4] C. L. Gupta and A. H. El-Abiad, "Determination of the closest unstable equilibrium state for Liapunov methods in transient stability studies," IEEE Transactions on Power Apparatus and Systems, vol. PAS-95, No. 5, pp. pp. 1699-1712, September/ October 1976.

Page 128: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

101

Chapter 5

Optimal Switching Near Separation

The advantages of finite-time damping performance introduced by the total

kinetic energy reduction control and the advantages of using saturation

function based switching near a stable equilibrium operating condition have

been introduced in earlier chapters. In the earlier chapters, while it is

appreciated that the use of weighted energy based control prevents a weak

area from separating, it is also note that the rate of changes of machine

angles associated with the weak area tends to hover close to zero near a

separation. This low rate of change of machine angles can result in possible

hovering of machine angles near separation which is not desirable since it is

necessary to yield from the control the overall greatest reduction in

disturbance energy.

A total energy control approach that is derived from Lyapunov based energy

function design and applied in a complex power system is shown to provide

Page 129: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

102

satisfactory energy reduction performance when severe disturbances are

encountered. Most energy-based controllers use a control proportional to

velocity and this provides satisfactory damping but not a good first swing

stability. This chapter addresses this problem of undesirable switching at

first swing by using a Single-Machine-Infinite-Bus (SMIB) example to

examine the cause of this problem. A constant energy surface diagram is

used in the analysis to demonstrate the key issue of switching control. An

angle look-ahead control is derived for the SMIB system as an effective

solution to this first swing switching stability problem. It is shown that

through the understanding of this problem, controller design can be made

effective in limiting the first swing without the loss of damping

performance.

5.1. Introduction

Lyapunov based energy reduction control is effective in damping

oscillations [1, 2]. This total energy approach [3] is applied in a two-area

DC link power system and had shown that velocity proportional control can

be used effectively in the control of complex power system. The δ& bang-

bang control in [3] gives satisfactory damping performances when severe

disturbances are encountered. However, this type of velocity based (δ& )

control also gives undesirable switching decisions at first swing and is

referred to as the first swing switching stability problem in this chapter.

Page 130: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

103

Conventional analyses of a first swing stability problem investigate whether

a system is close to separating. This information is not sufficient in

providing a clear understanding of the first swing stability problem in

switching control.

This chapter uses constant energy surface in phase portrait as an explicit

analysis tool to understand this first swing switching stability problem.

Through the formulation of a SMIB example, we seek to characterize this

first swing switching stability problem and disclose the causes of the

undesirable switching at first swing when δ& bang-bang control [3] is being

used. An improved understanding of the problem leads us to the

development of an angle look-ahead control which is found to be effective.

This chapter is organized into three parts. Firstly, a SMIB example will be

formulated to derive a δ& bang-bang control. Secondly, disturbances

introduced near the control limits will be examined to demonstrate that

undesirable switching instances can occur and compromise the performance

of the controller. The characterization of a first swing switching stability

problem is then proposed and consequently, the existence of a partly stable

region is recognized. The constant energy surface diagram is used as an

analysis tool as it gives clear illustration of the problem. Thirdly, angle

look–ahead dependant terms are derived and its influence is then examined

and used as an approximate, but effective, remedy to the first swing

switching stability problem. Minimum time control and robustness

Page 131: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

104

requirements are discussed in relation to the proposed solution. Fourthly, an

energy reduction switching line which implements an approximate

minimum time criteria will be proposed. An optimal look-ahead duration is

found at the reduced control limit.

5.2. A Velocity Proportional Control Based on Energy

A two-machine power system is shown in Figure 5.1 where the conductance

G2 is capable of real power modulation. The sign of G2 indicates a real

power withdrawal or injection at the connected bus. The device dynamics

describing the particular implementation of the controllable admittance G2

and the voltage variation at bus 3 will not be considered in this example.

The set of swing equations based on the reduced equation of the shown in

Figure 5.1 is

( ) ( )( )

( ) ( )( )

−∆+−∆+−∆+−

=

−∆+−∆+−∆+−

=

12212121

2121212222222

11121212

1212121111111

sin*

cos**

sin*

cos**

coa

m

coa

m

PmbUb

gUggUgPm

PmbUb

gUggUgPm

δδ

δ

δδ

δ

&&

&&

o

o

ωωδ

ωωδ

−=

−=

22

11&

& (5.1)

where pcoa1 is the perfect governor term [3-5], )*( gUg ∆+ and )*( bUb ∆+

are the respective changes in the shunt conductance and transfer admittance

in the reduced admittance matrix actualY [1] owing to control switching and

all δδ &&& , and ω are expressed in inertia frame.

Page 132: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

105

Figure 5.1: Two-machine system with breaking resistor at bus 3

The perfect governor terms (pcoa1) in (5.1) is

21

21211 mm

PPPPP eemm

coa +−−+

= (5.2)

The assumption of the perfect governor assumes there is no motion of the

COA [1]. The angles are equal to those measured in COA frame with no

governors. The changes in the reduced admittance matrix actualY through the

switching in and out of the conductance G2 is

outin

outactual

YYYYUYY

−=∆∆+= *

(5.3)

where Yin and Yout represent the network reduced admittance matrix for the

case as G2 switches in and out respectively, U is the switching input and

Y∆ is the change in reduced admittance matrix.

j 0.074 j 0.001 j 0.001

G2 (Braking resistor)

Pm1=5.0 Pm2=- 5.0 1 243

Gen 1 Gen 2

Page 133: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

106

Without the loss of generality, the inertia of machine 2 is set to approach

infinity and gives rise to a classical SMIB power system. The use of SMIB

power system simplifies the analysis of undesirable switching during the

first swing.

The kinetic energy function Vke for the power system using a total energy

approach [3] is in the form of

222

211 2

121

ωω mmVke += (5.4)

The derivative of Vke is

( )∑==

=

2

1

n

iiiike mV δδ &&&& (5.5)

Considering that all bus voltages are 1.0 p.u. and substituting the machine

angle acceleration from (5.1) into (5.5), the simplified keV& with the transfer

conductance terms neglected is

( )( )

∆+

∆+∆+∆−=

21212

12121222111

sin

sin ),(

δδ

δδδδδδ

b

bggUfVke &

&&&&& (5.6)

where ∆gii and ∆bij are the elements of ∆Y given in (5.3).

We maximize the reduction of total kinetic energy by making keV& (5.6) as

negative as possible and a δ& bang-bang control law is chosen as

) sgn (SU V = (5.7)

Page 134: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

107

where the sgn function is defined as

=<−

>=

0 0 for S 0 1 for S

0 1 for SU

V

V

V

The switching surface SV based on (5.6) is

∑ ∑ ∆+∆==

=

=

≠=

2

1

2

1)sin(

n

ii

n

ij

ijijiiV bgS δδ & (5.8)

Considering the classical SMIB version of Figure 5.1 mentioned earlier (by

assuming an infinite machine 2 inertia), we simplify (5.8) into

111δ&gSV ∆= (5.9)

where both ∆bij and 2δ& are neglected since ∆bij is significantly small due to

the nature of real power modulation and that 2δ& is zero when machine 2 has

infinite inertial constant in the SMIB case. As the δ& bang-bang control U

derived in (5.7) switches between its upper and lower limits as SV (5.9)

changes sign, we call 0=VS as the switching line. As this corresponds to

01=δ& provided 011 ≠∆g , the switching line for the δ& bang-bang control in

phase plane for all bounded δ is at

0=δ& (5.10)

Having defined the switching lines for the δ& bang-bang control law, the

characterisation of the first swing switching stability problem using the

classical SMIB case of Figure 5.1 will be discussed in the following section.

Page 135: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

108

5.3. Characterization of a First Swing Switching

Stability Problem

In switching control, stability limits can be visualized as the extension or

reduction of an existing stability limit of an unforced system. The δ&

switching control law (5.7) derived from total energy approach [3] aims at

maximising the reduction of total kinetic energy. As far as the switching

performance is concerned, the first swing switching response that occurs

between the upper and lower control limits has resulted in an undesirable

switching behaviour, which deteriorates control performance. Thus,

characterization of this first swing switching problem becomes important.

We examine this problem of first swing switching control by applying

severe faults at the bus 4 of the power system in Figure 5.1. The control

performances of a δ& bang-bang control law (5.7) result in a chattering

control U at first swing switching when high control effort is directed to

yield zero velocity. The result is shown in Figure 5.2.

Looking at Figure 5.2, it is found that machine angle hovers as the result of

an effectively zero damping in the power system when the control chatters

and these circumstances occur near an unstable equilibrium operating

condition.

Page 136: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

109

Figure 5.2: Control chatters and angle hovers at maximum as the forced

damping is effectively zero. Faults at bus 4 are cleared at 1.0459 seconds.

5.3.1. Recognizing a Partly Stable Region (PS Region)

The characterization of machine angle hovering is illustrated using a

constant energy surface diagram as an analysis tool. An understanding of

the switching operation helps in the development of control strategy.

It is evident from the constant energy surface diagram in Figure 5.3 that a

partly stable region is responsible for the undesirable switching effect when

the δ& bang-bang control (5.7) is used. In particular, in Figure 5.3, the

switching inside the PS region gives rise to a limit cycle instead of the

energy reduction effect. This becomes obvious when we look at the various

trajectory directions in the PS region in Figure 5.4.

0 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5

0.5

1

1.5

2

2.5

Time (sec.)

Mac

hine

ang

le,

δ 12

(rad

.)

0 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5

-1

-0.5

0

0.5

1

Con

trol

U

Time (sec.)

Machine angle

hovers

Controller output

chatters

Page 137: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

110

Machine angle

Mac

hine

ang

ular

vel

ocity

Constant energy surfaces in phase portrait plane

-2 -1 0 1 2 3 4-6

-4

-2

0

2

4

6 U+

U-

Uo

U+

curves U-

curves

Fault -on trajectory

Post fault trajectory U

ocurve

Limit cycle

-2 -1 0 1 2 3 4-6

-4

-2

0

2

4

6

-2 -1 0 1 2 3 4-6

-4

-2

0

2

4

6 U+

U-

Uo

U+

curves U-

curves

Fault -on trajectory

Post fault trajectory U

ocurve

Limit cycle

PS region

-2 -1 0 1 2 3 4-6

-4

-2

0

2

4

6

-2 -1 0 1 2 3 4-6

-4

-2

0

2

4

6 U+

U-

Uo

U+

curves U-

curves

Fault -on trajectory

Post fault trajectory U

ocurve

Limit cycle

-2 -1 0 1 2 3 4-6

-4

-2

0

2

4

6

-2 -1 0 1 2 3 4-6

-4

-2

0

2

4

6U+U-Uo

U+ curves U- curves

Fault-on trajectory-

Post-fault trajectory Uo curve

Limit cycle

PS region

Machine angle

Mac

hine

ang

ular

vel

ocity

Constant energy surfaces in phase portrait plane

-2 -1 0 1 2 3 4-6

-4

-2

0

2

4

6

-2 -1 0 1 2 3 4-6

-4

-2

0

2

4

6 U+

U-

Uo

U+

curves U-

curves

Fault -on trajectory

Post fault trajectory U

ocurve

Limit cycle

-2 -1 0 1 2 3 4-6

-4

-2

0

2

4

6

-2 -1 0 1 2 3 4-6

-4

-2

0

2

4

6 U+

U-

Uo

U+

curves U-

curves

Fault -on trajectory

Post fault trajectory U

ocurve

Limit cycle

PS region

-2 -1 0 1 2 3 4-6

-4

-2

0

2

4

6

-2 -1 0 1 2 3 4-6

-4

-2

0

2

4

6 U+

U-

Uo

U+

curves U-

curves

Fault -on trajectory

Post fault trajectory U

ocurve

Limit cycle

-2 -1 0 1 2 3 4-6

-4

-2

0

2

4

6

-2 -1 0 1 2 3 4-6

-4

-2

0

2

4

6U+U-Uo

U+ curves U- curves

Fault-on trajectory-

Post-fault trajectory Uo curve

Limit cycle

PS region

Figure 5.3: Effect of δ& bang-bang control switching in the PS region

causing control chattering. Fault cleared at 1.0459 seconds.

In Figure 5.4, it is seen that the system trajectory follows one of the U+

curves towards the 0=δ& switching line derived earlier in (5.10). As δ&

became negative, the system trajectory is switched to the U- trajectory in the

direction towards the 0=δ& switching line. The repeated switching results in

a constant magnitude oscillation or a limit cycle.

Page 138: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

111

Machine angle

Mac

hine

ang

ular

vel

ocity

Constant energy surfaces in phase portrait plane

2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7 2.8 2.9 3 3.1 3.2

-1

-0.5

0

0.5

1

U+

curves

U-

curves

Uo

curve

Limit cycle

Post faultTrajectory

PS region U+U-Uo

2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7 2.8 2.9 3 3.1 3.2

-1

-0.5

0

0.5

1

U+

curves

U-

curves

Uo

curve

Limit cycle

Post faultTrajectory

PS region U+U-Uo

U+U-Uo

2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7 2.8 2.9 3 3.1 3.2

-1

-0.5

0

0.5

1

U+

curves

U-

curves

Uo

curve

Limit cycle

Post faultTrajectory

PS region U+U-Uo

U+U-Uo

2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7 2.8 2.9 3 3.1 3.2

-1

-0.5

0

0.5

1

U+ curves

U- curves

Uo curves

Limit cycle

Post-faulttrajectory

PS region U+UoU-

Machine angle

Mac

hine

ang

ular

vel

ocity

Constant energy surfaces in phase portrait plane

2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7 2.8 2.9 3 3.1 3.2

-1

-0.5

0

0.5

1

U+

curves

U-

curves

Uo

curve

Limit cycle

Post faultTrajectory

PS region U+U-Uo

U+U-Uo

2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7 2.8 2.9 3 3.1 3.2

-1

-0.5

0

0.5

1

U+

curves

U-

curves

Uo

curve

Limit cycle

Post faultTrajectory

PS region U+U-Uo

U+U-Uo

U+U-Uo

U+U-Uo

2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7 2.8 2.9 3 3.1 3.2

-1

-0.5

0

0.5

1

U+

curves

U-

curves

Uo

curve

Limit cycle

Post faultTrajectory

PS region U+U-Uo

U+U-Uo

2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7 2.8 2.9 3 3.1 3.2

-1

-0.5

0

0.5

1

U+ curves

U- curves

Uo curves

Limit cycle

Post-faulttrajectory

PS region U+UoU-

Figure 5.4: A close-up view of the partly stable region showing two sets of

trajectories directing towards the 0=δ& switching line.

It is apparent that switching in a PS region is highly undesirable and the

indication of control chattering leading to the hovering of machine angle has

provided a distinctive characterisation of a partly stable region in this

control switching application.

Observing both Figure 5.3 and 5.4, it is noted that one possible solution to

the problem of control chattering is to introduce a delay in switching (or a

phase shift) to avoid the switching in the PS region. For instance, the

switching decision at the 0=δ& switching line could be adequately delayed

until the system trajectory moves out of the PS region. In control context,

such a strategy is equivalent to introducing a phase shift to the 0=δ&

switching line at. Instead of switching at 0=δ& regardless of the angular

Page 139: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

112

position, both velocity and position proportional control are used when a

system trajectory is close to a PS region. This forces switching outside a PS

region while the system trajectory remains non-divergent since it is inside

the region of attraction extended by the U+ curve in Figure 5.4. As delayed

switching can be in a form of look-ahead control, angle look-ahead terms

are discussed in the next section.

5.4. The Undesirable Effect of Saturation Function

From the earlier sections, it is noted that switching in the partly stable

region (PS region) using a δ& bang-bang control results in control chattering

followed by the hovering of machine angle. Before an angle look-ahead

term is examined, the deficiency of using a saturation function at first swing

is studied.

It is understood from the earlier chapter that a saturation function is capable

of preventing control chattering near a stable equilibrium operating

condition and it has the form of

≤≤−−<−

>==

1 S 1S for 1 1 for S

1 1 for SU) sat(S U

V

V

V

V

and

where SV has been defined earlier in association with equation (5.8).

Page 140: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

113

The result of using a saturation function at first swing is shown in Figure 5.5

when a severe fault which occurred at bus 4 is cleared at a critical clearing

time of 1.067 seconds.

-2 -1 0 1 2 3 4-6

-4

-2

0

2

4

6Constant energy surface in phase portrait

Machine angle

Mac

hien

ang

ular

vel

ocity

Uo U- U+ System trajectory

Figure 5.5: Undesirable effect of using a δ& saturation function at first swing

when the severe faults at bus 4 are cleared at 1.067 seconds.

(a): Control output U reduces its value at the wrong instances.

(b): System trajectory in phase portrait becomes unstable.

0 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4-0.5

0

0.5

1

Time

Con

trol

out

put U

U

(a)

(b)

Page 141: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

114

The result in Figure 5.5 has indicated that switching between the upper and

lower control limits at first swing is crucial to the survival of the power

system when control effort is most needed. The use of a δ& saturation

function control at first swing while switching in a linear region becomes

undesirable as the control value reduces. The result of reduced control value

at critical moments is shown in the subplot (1) of Figure 5.5 and the

consequences of an unstable system trajectory due to a reduced control

value is shown in Figure 5.5 (b).

5.5. An Angle Look-ahead Control

In this section, angle look-ahead dependant terms are being derived for the

SMIB system in Figure 5.1 and its integration with the existing velocity

proportional bang-bang control (5.7) is discussed.

First, we consider an angle error cost function of

2)()( sg δδηδ −= (5.11)

where η is the scalar multiplier and sδ is the machine angle at the stable

equilibrium operating condition.

Applying the Taylor series expansion to (5.11) with the third and higher

order terms neglected, we have

Page 142: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

115

2)()(

2TgTgtgTtg

∆+∆+=+ &&& (5.12)

The first term of (5.12) is similar to (5.11) while the second and third terms

are expanded into

( )2

)(2)(22

)(22

22 TT

g

TTg

s

s

∆+−=

∆−=∆

ηδδδδ

δδδη

&&&&&

&& (5.13)

Considering that all bus voltages are 1.0 p.u., (5.1) is substituted into (5.13)

and simplified to

( )),())((222 11

1

22δδδδ

η &&& fgUmTT

g s +∆−−∆

=∆

(5.14)

Substituting equations (5.13 - 5.14) into (5.12) and considering only the

controllable terms that are function of U, equation (5.12) reduces to

))(()( 111

2

gmT

UTtg s ∆−∆

−=+ δδη

(5.15)

From (5.15), we obtain the position proportional dependant term SP for the

SMIB power system

∑∑=

=

=

≠=

∆+∆−∆=

2

1

2

1

2 )sin)((n

i

n

ij i

ijijiisii

P m

bgTS

δδδη (5.16)

Page 143: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

116

We understand that the total energy approach in (5.4) yields the velocity

dependant term SV in (5.7) and the angle error cost function look-ahead in

(5.12) yields the position dependant term SP in (5.16). Incorporating (5.12)

with (5.4), we obtain a total switching surface ST that contains both a

velocity (5.7) and a position (5.16) dependant term

∑ ∑

∆+∆−∆+

∆+∆

==

=

=

≠=

2

1

2

1 2 )sin)((

)sin(n

i

n

ij

i

ijijiisii

ijijiii

T

m

bgT

bg

S δδδη

δδ&

(5.17)

The new control law is

)sgn(SU T= (5.18)

where the sgn function has been defined earlier in association with (5.7).

Based on the switching surface ST (5.18), an improved controller

performance is achieved for the first swing switching stability problem due

to the incorrect switching near or inside the partly stable region. This

improvement is shown in Figure 5.6.

Page 144: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

117

Optimal switching line

Vertical limit

Machine angle

Mac

hine

ang

ular

vel

ocity

Constant energy surfaces in phase portrait plane

-2 -1 0 1 2 3 4-6

-4

-2

0

2

4

6 U+ curves

U- curvesUo curve

Fault trajectory-

Post-fault trajectory

U+UoU-

OptimalSwitching line

Vertical limit

PS region

Optimal switching line

Vertical limit

Machine angle

Mac

hine

ang

ular

vel

ocity

Constant energy surfaces in phase portrait plane

-2 -1 0 1 2 3 4-6

-4

-2

0

2

4

6 U+ curves

U- curvesUo curve

Fault trajectory-

Post-fault trajectory

U+UoU-

OptimalSwitching line

Vertical limit

PS region

Optimal switching line

Vertical limit

Machine angle

Mac

hine

ang

ular

vel

ocity

Constant energy surfaces in phase portrait plane

-2 -1 0 1 2 3 4-6

-4

-2

0

2

4

6 U+ curves

U- curvesUo curve

Fault trajectory-

Post-fault trajectory

U+UoU-

OptimalSwitching line

Vertical limit

PS region

Figure 5.6: The use of total switching line ST in the δ& bang-bang control

avoids the chattering of control.

(a): The effect of using ST avoided the hovering of machine angle and

chattering of control U.

(b): The system trajectory becomes stable as switching is being delayed

appropriately.

0 1 2 3 4 5

-0.8

-0.4

0

0.4

0.8

U

Time (sec.)

Con

trol

ler o

utpu

t U

-

0 1 2 3 4 5- -0.50

0.5

1

1.5

2

2.5

3

Time (sec.)

Mac

hine

ang

le 1

Delayedswitching

0 1 2 3 4 5

-0.8

-0.4

0

0.4

0.8

-

0 1 2 3 4 5

-0.8

-0.4

0

0.4

0.8

-

0 1 2 3 4 5

0

0.5

1

1.5

2

2.5

3

0 1 2 3 4 5

0

0.5

1

1.5

2

2.5

3

Delayedswitching Delayedswitching

(a)

(b)

Page 145: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

118

Comparing Figure 5.6 (a) with Figure 5.2, it is apparent that a slight phase

shift introduced in the δ& bang-bang control (subplot (1) of Figure 5.6)

significantly reduces the hovering of machine angle near the Unstable

Equilibrium Point [4] (UEP). With reference to the PS region as shown in

the subplot (2) of Figure 5.6, it is obvious that in order to avoid switching

inside a PS region, we need an optimal switching line consisting of both

vertical limit and optimal slope. In the next section, we will discuss the

vertical limit and optimal slope are being established.

5.5.1. An Optimal Switching Line

In Figure 5.6, an optimal switching line is found for the first swing

switching stability problem. From the above characterization of the first

swing switching stability problem, it is recognised that switching on the

0=δ& switching line inside the PS region is detrimental as illustrated in

Figure 5.7. However, it is acceptable to switch at 0=δ& before the reduced

UEP, which is simply a reduced transient stability limit due to the lower

control limit of 1−=U . This provides us with a key line at the reduced

UEP. Similarly, it is also unsafe to switch inside the PS region when 0≠δ&

which provides us with the optimal slope as shown in Figure 5.8.

Page 146: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

119

The Figure 5.7 and 5.8 explained the construction of the optimal switching

line portrayed in Figure 5.6 as the boundary of the PS region for desirable

switching results.

Machine angle

Mac

hine

ang

ular

vel

ocity

Constant energy surfaces in phase portrait plane

-2 -1 0 1 2 3 4-6

-4

-2

0

2

4

6

U- curve

Uo curve

U+ curve

Post-fault trajectory

Fault trajectory

2

4

6

Switching onBefore the vertical limit. The vertical limit

Switching oninside the PS region

U+UoU-

0=•δ

= 0•δ

Machine angle

Mac

hine

ang

ular

vel

ocity

Constant energy surfaces in phase portrait plane

-2 -1 0 1 2 3 4-6

-4

-2

0

2

4

6

U- curve

Uo curve

U+ curve

Post-fault trajectory

Fault trajectory

2

4

6

Switching onBefore the vertical limit. The vertical limit

Switching oninside the PS region

U+UoU-

0=•δ

= 0•δ

-2 -1 0 1 2 3 4-6

-4

-2

0

2

4

6

U- curve

Uo curve

U+ curve

Post-fault trajectory

Fault trajectory

2

4

6

2

4

6

Switching onBefore the vertical limit. The vertical limit

Switching oninside the PS region

U+UoU-

0=•δ

= 0•δ

Figure 5.7: Understanding a divider line at a reduced UEP.

Figure 5.8: Understanding an optimal slope.

Machine angle

Mac

hine

ang

ular

vel

ocity

Constant energy surfaces in phase portrait plane

-2 -1 0 1 2 3 4-6

-4

-2

0

2

4

6

Switching on

optimal slope

Switching inside

PS region, offthe optimal slope

The optimal slope

U+curve

U- curve

Faul

-on trajectory

Post fault trajectory

U ocurve

-2 -1 0 1 2 3 4-6

-4

-2

0

2

4

6

Switching on the

optimal slope

Switching inside the

PS region, off the

Optimal slope

The optimal slope

U+

U- curve

Fault

Post-fault trajectory

Uo curve

Page 147: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

120

The implementation of this optimal switching line (Figure 5.6) requires

accurate switching on the line or else we may be riskily switching in the PS

region. The use of optimal switching line becomes impractical when we

consider the robustness of a control design to accommodate modelling

errors and control tolerances. One possible solution is to replace the optimal

switching line in Figure 5.6 by the approximated switching line as shown in

Figure 5.9 which uses a divider line at a reduced UEP instead of an optimal

slope. This approximated switching line forces switching on the divider line

at the reduced UEP (Figure 5.7) instead of the optimal slope (Figure 5.8) for

relatively large disturbances.

However, this type of approximated switching line will again become

impractical when the robustness of a control design is considered, in

particular, when disturbances occur in the vicinity of the reduced UEP. By

comparing this approximated switching line with a total switching line

based on ST as derived in (5.16), it is obvious that ST is capable of solving

this problem associated with the robustness of the control design. The total

switching line ST is illustrated in Figure 5.9.

In view of the minimum time criteria, we must also consider the issue of

optimal look-ahead T∆ affecting the switching results of a total switching

line ST. In the next section, a snapshot of the switching in the vicinity of the

approximated switching line (Figure 5.9) will be discussed in order to

determine the optimal look-ahead T∆ .

Page 148: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

121

Machine angle

Mac

hine

ang

ular

vel

ocity

Constant energy surfaces in phase portrait plane

-2 -1 0 1 2 3 4-6

-4

-2

0

2

4

6

U+ curve

Uo curve U- curve

The approximated switching line

Total switching line ST

U+U oU-

Stable equilibrium

-2 -1 0 1 2 3 4-6

-4

-2

0

2

4

6

U+ curveUo curve

U- curve

The approximated switching line

Total switching line S

T

U+U oU-

Stable equilibrium

Machine angle

Mac

hine

ang

ular

vel

ocity

Constant energy surfaces in phase portrait plane

-2 -1 0 1 2 3 4-6

-4

-2

0

2

4

6

U+ curve

Uo curve U- curve

The approximated switching line

Total switching line ST

U+U oU-

Stable equilibrium

-2 -1 0 1 2 3 4-6

-4

-2

0

2

4

6

U+ curveUo curve

U- curve

The approximated switching line

Total switching line S

T

U+U oU-

Stable equilibrium

-2 -1 0 1 2 3 4-6

-4

-2

0

2

4

6

U+ curve

Uo curve U- curve

The approximated switching line

Total switching line ST

U+U oU-

Stable equilibrium

-2 -1 0 1 2 3 4-6

-4

-2

0

2

4

6

U+ curveUo curve

U- curve

The approximated switching line

Total switching line S

T

U+U oU-

Stable equilibrium

Figure 5.9: Illustration of the approximated switching line and the total

switching line ST.

5.6. An Optimal Look-ahead T∆ that Satisfies the

Minimum Time Criteria

Using the total switching line ST, we seek to investigate the differences in

switching results when the control switches in the vicinity of the

approximated switching line. It is seen from Figure 5.10 that while using an

optimal look-ahead T∆ of 1.2, the switching that is initiated in the region

between the approximated switching line (in Figure 5.9) and the optimal

slope (in Figure 5.8), defined as the sensitive region in this chapter, causes

control chattering. This is easily understood by observing the trajectories

Page 149: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

122

direction in Figure 5.10 (a) that in this sensitive region, the system trajectory

is supposed to switch to the U- curve that brings it away from the ST

switching line instead of directing towards the ST switching line. This results

in the repeated switching operation around the ST switching line which

appears as control chattering (Figure 5.10 (b)). The ST switching line

provides sufficient condition for sliding and the system trajectory chatters

towards the stable equilibrium operating point. This is different from the

explicitly designed sliding mode control.

However, this chattering behaviour does not occur when an optimal look-

ahead ∆T of 1.7 is used, the system trajectory switches beyond the vertical

limit (i.e., the reduced UEP) at the total switching line ST. The system

trajectory follows the U- curve directing away from the ST switching line. A

desirable result can be obtained using ∆T=1.7 where the near minimum-time

energy reduction is achieved without any control chattering.

Page 150: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

123

Machine angle

Mac

hine

ang

ular

Vel

ocity

Constant energy surfaces in phase portrait plane

2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 3 3.2

-2

-1.5

-1

-0.5

0

0.5

1

Uocurve

U+curve

U- curves

Verticallimit

Post fault trajectory

Post fault trajectory

U+UoU-

)7.1( ?? TSTST )2.1( ??T

Uocurve

U+curve

U- curves

Post fault trajectory B

Post fault trajectory Aswitching before the divider line

U+UoU -

+o-

)7.1( )7.1∆T=

)2.1( )2.1

ST

STThe approximated switching line

Controller chatters

switching after the divider line

∆T=

2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 3 3.2

-2

-1.5

-1

-0.5

0

0.5

1

Uocurve

U+curve

U- curves

Verticallimit

Post fault trajectory

Post fault trajectory

U+UoU-

)7.1( ?? TSTST )2.1( ??T

Uocurve

U+curve

U- curves

Post fault trajectory B

Post fault trajectory Aswitching before the divider line

U+UoU -

+o-

)7.1( )7.1∆T=

)2.1( )2.1

ST

STThe approximated switching line

Controller chatters

switching after the divider line

∆T=

Machine angle

Mac

hine

ang

ular

Vel

ocity

Constant energy surfaces in phase portrait plane

2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 3 3.2

-2

-1.5

-1

-0.5

0

0.5

1

Uocurve

U+curve

U- curves

Verticallimit

Post fault trajectory

Post fault trajectory

U+UoU-

)7.1( ?? TSTST )2.1( ??T

Uocurve

U+curve

U- curves

Post fault trajectory B

Post fault trajectory Aswitching before the divider line

U+UoU -

+o-

)7.1( )7.1∆T=

)2.1( )2.1

ST

STThe approximated switching line

Controller chatters

switching after the divider line

∆T=

2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 3 3.2

-2

-1.5

-1

-0.5

0

0.5

1

Uocurve

U+curve

U- curves

Verticallimit

Post fault trajectory

Post fault trajectory

U+UoU-

)7.1( ?? TSTST )2.1( ??T

Uocurve

U+curve

U- curves

Post fault trajectory B

Post fault trajectory Aswitching before the divider line

U+UoU -

+o-

)7.1( )7.1∆T=

)2.1( )2.1

ST

STThe approximated switching line

Controller chatters

switching after the divider line

∆T=

2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 3 3.2

-2

-1.5

-1

-0.5

0

0.5

1

Uocurve

U+curve

U- curves

Verticallimit

Post fault trajectory

Post fault trajectory

U+UoU-

)7.1( ?? TSTST )2.1( ??T

Uocurve

U+curve

U- curves

Post fault trajectory B

Post fault trajectory Aswitching before the divider line

U+UoU -

+o-

)7.1( )7.1∆T=

)2.1( )2.1

ST

STThe approximated switching line

Controller chatters

switching after the divider line

∆T=

2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 3 3.2

-2

-1.5

-1

-0.5

0

0.5

1

Uocurve

U+curve

U- curves

Verticallimit

Post fault trajectory

Post fault trajectory

U+UoU-

)7.1( ?? TSTST )2.1( ??T

Uocurve

U+curve

U- curves

Post fault trajectory B

Post fault trajectory Aswitching before the divider line

U+UoU -

+o-

)7.1( )7.1∆T=

)2.1( )2.1

ST

STThe approximated switching line

Controller chatters

switching after the divider line

∆T=

Figure 5.10: Delayed switching performance using ∆T=1.2 (dashed) and

∆T=1.7 (solid).

(a) A close-up view of the two different cases of delayed switching near

PS region.

(b) The delayed switching using ∆T=1.2 (dashed) experiences minor

control chattering.

-0.5 0 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 3-4

-3

-2

-1

0

1

2

3

4

Machine angle (radian)

Mac

hine

spe

ed (

rad.

/sec

.)

Minor chattering of control effort U when ∆T=1.2 is used.

(a)

(b)

Page 151: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

124

We have shown that with the appropriate use of look-ahead T∆ , an optimal

switching line ST that satisfies the minimum time criteria is found near the

reduced UEP. It is seen from Figure 5.10 that switching based on a ∆T of

1.2 resulted in a higher energy reduction whereas the use of a larger look-

ahead of ∆T of 1.7 has a lower energy reduction effect. In spite of these

differences in energy reduction performance, their differences in settling

time are small. A time domain response is shown in Figure 5.11.

An optimal switching line ST that depends on the appropriate use of ∆T as

clarified in Figure 5.10 and satisfies the minimum time requirement without

the significantly prolonged settling time is proposed to counter the first

swing switching stability problem. The robustness of a control design has

been addressed. Verification of the energy control based on the total

switching line ST using a simple SMIB power system yields satisfactory

results which overcomes the first swing switching stability problem and

makes the energy control robust.

Page 152: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

125

Figure 5.11: Insignificant settling time between the two examples of

switching at different instances.

5.7. Conclusion

In switching control applications, this partly stable region has not previously

been identified and this chapter addresses it hoping to maximize a switching

control effect during the most crucial phase of transient stability.

A total energy based proportional control has been outlined. The effect of a

δ& saturation control applied near a stable operating condition was found

satisfactory in earlier chapter. However, it is noted in this chapter that a δ&

saturation control applied at a critical first swing is undesirable and causes a

0

1

2

3

4

5

6 -

0.5

0

0.5

1

1.5

2

2.5

3

Time (sec.)

Mac

hine

ang

le

Time plot of machine angle

Machine angle response

due to switching with

Machine angle response

due to switching with

2 . 1 = ∆ T

7 . 1 = ∆ T

0

1

2

3

4

5

6 -

0.5

0

0.5

1

1.5

2

2.5

3

Machine angle response due to switching with

Machine angle response due to switching with

1.2= ∆ T

=∆ T 1.7

Page 153: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

126

power system separation where machine 1 separates from machine 2. An

optimal switching line ST overcomes the detrimental first swing switching

stability problem with an optimal look-ahead duration. The optimal look-

ahead duration has prevented a δ& bang-bang control from switching inside

a partly stable region. This control design is shown to be robust with respect

to measurement errors. This optimal look-ahead approach can also be

extended to a δ& saturation control to prevent the control from switching

into linear regions thereby reducing the required control strength at first

swing.

The optimal switching using the total switching line ST with the appropriate

angle look-ahead duration ∆T is, however, not easily applicable to a multi-

machine power system. The reason is because multi-machine power system

gives rise to these multiple UEPs. Each of these multiple UEPs gives rise to

a possibility for a mode of separation. In the next chapter, an Energy

Decomposition is introduced to identify each UEP for control

implementation, with the major control strategy extended from SMIB

concepts of optimal switching and PS region.

Page 154: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

127

5.8. References

[1] G. Ledwich, J. Fernandez-Vargas, and X. Yu, "Switching Control of Multi-machine Power Systems," IEEE / KTH Stockholm Power Tech Conference, Stockholm, Sweden, pp. 138-142, June 1995,

[2] E. Palmer and G. Ledwich, "Switching control for power systems with line lossess," IEE Proceedings- Generation, Transmission, Distributions, vol. 146, No.5, pp. 435-440, September 1999.

[3] T. W. Chan and G. Ledwich, "Multi-mode damping using single HVDC link," Aupec 2001, Perth, Australia, pp. 483-488, September 2001,

[4] M. A. Pai, Power System Stability - Analysis by the Direct Method of Lyapunov, vol. 3: North-Holland Publishing Company, 1981.

[5] G. Ledwich and E. Palmer, "Energy Function For Power Systems with Transmission Losses," IEEE Transactions on Power Systems, vol. 12, No. 2, pp. 785-790, May 1997.

Page 155: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

128

This page is intentionally left blank.

Page 156: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

129

Chapter 6.

Towards Improving the Transfer Capacity

The transfer capacity of an electrical transmission system is limited by two

concerns, thermal rating and transient stability. One of the problems

associated with the control of a large power system is the need to consider

several modes of separation (referred to as cutsets in this thesis). In the

presence of weak links, several modes of separation may be at risk during

major faults. This may cause a power system to separate eventually at a

UEP instead of the Controlling UEP. In this chapter, we develop the

concepts of energy decomposition. In particular the energy term associated

with each of the mode of separation. The control strategy based on these

decomposed energy aims at any cutsets that are most likely to cause a power

system separation. In essence, the proposed control maximizes the

synchronism amongst generators and damps the subsequent oscillations.

Finally, the control proposed is demonstrated on a detailed six-machine 21-

bus system.

Page 157: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

130

6.1. Introduction

There are increasing pressures to operate power systems closer to stability

limits. The main reasons for this arises from the increases in load demand

within urban areas that are far from large generators, restrictions on

transmission network expansion and geographical constraints that place

large generators far from load centers. This desire to maximize the use of

existing assets increases the desirability of control which can maximize the

retention of synchronism.

In a large power system, there are multiple links between generations. Faults

on different parts of the network stress these links differently such that some

links can withstand severe faults while others break more easily, and we

termed these as strong and weak links respectively. Generally, system

instability is characterized by a system separating into two groups of

generators [1] as some weak links break (or are disconnected by circuit

breakers) and result in one generator or a group of coherent generators

separating from the rest of the system. The enumeration of the generators in

a coherent group which can separate from the rest of the system

characterizes cutsets in this thesis. This is a different concept to the group of

transmission lines necessary to be broken for power system separation in the

structured preserving cutsets introduced in [2]. In a structured preserving

Page 158: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

131

cutset [2], line indices are used and one or more structured preserving

cutsets can be described as the same separation between two groups of

generators. On the other hand, the definition of cutsets used in this chapter is

concerned with the separation of a power system between two coherent

groups of generators and it adopts generator indices. For brevity, the phrase

of “power system separation” will be used interchangeably with

“separation” and “cutset” in this chapter.

In a transient stability and energy context, the concept of energy function [1]

is widely used to predict angle instability [2-4] as well as evaluating the

critical energy of a separation. A recent extension of energy function using

remote measurements and derivative of energy function in the design of

energy based switching control [5, 6] has shown good damping

performance. In terms of avoiding a power system separation, the retention

of synchronism and damping of subsequent oscillations are considered to be

important. With the issue of the damping of subsequent oscillations being

well understood and managed, the ability of a control to provide the

successful retention of synchronism becomes the focus of this chapter. This

control must be capable of directing the correct effort to avoid a high risk

separation amongst all types of feasible separations. Hence, the

characterization of feasible cutsets (or separations) became critical in

achieving this objective. Ultimately, this control aims to provide a high

chance of survival for the power system in its normal configuration.

Page 159: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

132

With regards to this survival issue, this chapter introduces two concepts; (i)

a total energy decomposition technique that characterizes the transient

energy of every cutset (or separation), and (ii) a control strategy based on

the weighting of separation energy combined with the proximity-to-

separation detection.

6.2. Total Energy Decomposition – Cutset Energy

This section describes a total energy decomposition technique that is used to

characterize cutsets. We illustrate the total energy decomposition using a

three-machine 6 bus power system as shown in Figure 6.1

j0.06251

3

4 5 2

0.0085+j0.072

0.1219+j0.1008

j0.0586

6 j0.0576

Figure 6.1: A three-machine 6-bus system is used to illustrate the possible

separations.

From Figure 6.1, there are six possible separations (or cutsets) associated

with the separation between two groups of generators, and it is possible to

have one or more coherent generators in each group of generators. These six

possible separations are also referred to as feasible separations as these

Page 160: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

133

separations describe two groups of generators that are separated from each

other. These separations are categorized into set A and B,

)3/12( , )12/3( )2/13( , )13/2(

)1/23( , )32/1(

)123( ,(123)

cutsets Possible

3#3#

2#2#

1#1#

0#0#

BA

BA

BA

BA

(6.1)

where the cutsets of set A and B are identified by the subscripts (#0A, #1A,

#2A, #3A) and (#0B, #1B, #2B, #3B) respectively, and the cutset (i/jk) refers

to the separation between two groups of coherent generators; one contained

the ith generator while the other contains the jth and kth coherent generators.

From the potential energy [1] aspect, both cutsets of set A and B needs to be

considered as the nth cutset (i/jk)#nA of set A and nth cutset (jk/i)#nB of set B

having different potential energy evaluated at their corresponding UEP. The

purpose of including the cutsets (123)#0A and (123)#0B that are not a mode of

separation is for completeness so that energy decomposition can be

validated.

Considering a hypothetical situation where the generator 2 in Figure 6.1 is

connected directly to bus 5, the cutsets (2/13)#2A and (13/2)#2B are no longer

considered as feasible cutsets as they do not result in a separation forming

two groups of generators. This hypothetical example makes it easy to

understand that in a large power system, it is possible to have fewer feasible

cutsets than possible cutsets. In addition, it is also understandable from

examining the longitudinal network configuration of the power system in

Page 161: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

134

Figure 6.1 that it is possible to have fewer feasible cutsets in a longitudinal

power system than a meshed power system.

Some mathematical assumptions are used in the Energy Decomposition of

kinetic energy. In a group of generators, for any two coherent generators

that swing in the same direction, the square of the sums of generators’

angular velocity in the form of 2)( jjii mm ωω + is used whereas for two

generators, each from a different group of generators, that oscillate against

each other, the square of the differences of generators’ angular velocity in

the form of 2)( jjii mm ωω − is used. For instance, as a separation occurs

associated with the cutset (1/23), the oscillation between generator 1 and the

coherent generators (i.e., generators 2 and 3) is described by the terms

22211 )( ωω mm − and

23311 )( ωω mm − while the oscillating behaviour

of the two coherent generators 2 and 3 is described by 2

3322 )( ωω mm + .

The reason for using the product term iim ω in the above mathematical

assumption is to enable the inertial and velocity product term of )( 2iim ω to

be formed after the decomposition process. This provides a convenient

mathematical mapping between the cutset kinetic energy and the total

kinetic energy. On the other hand, the squares of the sums or differences of

angular velocity terms 2)( jjii mm ωω ± are found to be able to represent

Page 162: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

135

separation amongst generators fairly well, in that, after a decomposition

process the chosen signal responds strongly to separation. For instance, as

generator 1 is being separated from generator 2, the term

22211 )( ωω mm − becomes large whereas the term

22211 )( ωω mm +

remains comparatively small.

For the ease of handling the above terms, we define a new notation,

iii m ωη = (6.2)

where m and ω are the respective generator inertial constant and generator

angular velocity.

By substituting equation (6.2) into the square of the sums and the square of

the differences terms, these terms become compact. New cutset notations

are used and hereafter referred to as the p and n terms,

( ) ( )22 , jinjip ijij ηηηη −=+= (6.3)

where i and j refers to the respective ith and jth generators. The ijp refers to

the ith and jth generators that swing in the same direction whereas ijn refers to

the ith and jth generators that swing against each other. Examining the

equation (6.3), it has a symmetrical properties of ijn=jin and ijp=jip.

Expanding equation (6.1) using the square of the sums and the square of the

differences terms based on the new cutset notation η , we have

Page 163: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

136

B

B

B

B

A

A

A

A

3# 2

212

322

31

2# 2

312

232

21

1# 2

322

132

12

0# 2

322

312

21

3# 2

212

232

13

2# 2

312

322

12

1# 2

322

312

21

0# 2

322

312

21

)(,)(,)(

)(,)(,)(

)(,)(,)(

)(,)(,)(

)(,)(,)(

)(,)(,)(

)(,)(,)(

)(,)(,)(

ηηηηηη

ηηηηηη

ηηηηηη

ηηηηηη

ηηηηηη

ηηηηηη

ηηηηηη

ηηηηηη

+−−

+−−

+−−

+++

+−−

+−−

+−−

+++

(6.4)

In order to map all cutsets in equation (6.4) to the total kinetic energy Vke

[1], we use the symmetrical properties of ijn=jin and ijp=jip, and sum all the

cutsets components in equation (6.4). The sum of all cutset kinetic energy

becomes

−+−+−+

++++++=

232

231

221

232

231

221

#)()()(4

)()()(4

ηηηηηη

ηηηηηηkeV (6.5)

where Vke# is the sum of all cutset kinetic energy and η is a cutset notation

defined earlier in association with equation (6.2).

A direct expansion and manipulation of the (ηi+ηj)2 and (ηi-ηj)2 terms in

equation (6.5) has resulted in

)21

21

21

(32

)(16

23

22

21

23

22

21#

ηηη

ηηη

++=

++=keV (6.6)

Page 164: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

137

Replacing the η notation in equation (6.6) with the iim ω terms in

equation (6.2), the sum of all cutset kinetic energy in masses and machine

angular velocity is

)21

21

21

(32 233

222

211# ωωω mmmVke ++= (6.7)

Comparing equation (6.7) with the total kinetic energy Vke, we establish a

mapping relation between Vke# and Vke,

keke VV 32# = (6.8)

To express the total kinetic energy in terms of the p and n terms from

equation (6.3), we rewrite equation (6.4) by replacing all η terms with the p

and n terms

BpnnBpnn

BpnnBpppApnn

ApnnApnnAppp

3# 2#

1# 0# 3#

2# 1# 0#

12,23,13,13,32,12

23,31,21,23,13,12,12,32,31

13,23,21,23,13,12,23,13,12

(6.9)

Knowing that the sum of all cutset kinetic energy Vke# in equation (6.5) is

derived from the summation of all cutsets in equation (6.4), the total kinetic

energy expressed using the p and n terms is obtained by summing all cutsets

in equation (6.9).

Page 165: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

138

++++++

+++++++

+++++++

++++++

=

BpnnBpnn

BpnnBppp

ApnnApnn

ApnnAppp

keV

3#2#

1#0#

3#2#

1#0#

)122313()133212(

)233121()231312(

)123231()132321(

)231312()231312(

321

(6.10)

where 21n=12n (i.e. ijn=jin) and 12p=21p (i.e. ijp=jip).

6.2.1. General Algebraic Expression for Cutset Kinetic Energy

By referring to equation (6.10) and the derivation that yields equation (6.8),

an algebraic expression for an n-machine system is

−∑+

+∑

+∑+

+∑

+∑

Ω=

=

==

+=

=

+==

µ

υυ

υυ

υυ

υυ

υυ

υυ

ω

ω

ω

ω

ω

ω

0

1

2

)()(

)()(

1

1

2

)()(

)()(

1

1

2

)()(

)()(

1

1

w

w

rn

j jrjr

isissn

i

snn

ij jrjr

irirsnn

i

sn

ij jsjs

isissn

i

ke

m

m

m

m

m

m

V (6.11)

where µ is the total number of separations, w is the counting index for the

wth cutset, sυ is the vector of indices of the generators separated from the

rest of the system, rυ is the vector of indices of the remaining generators

that do not appear in vector sυ (or machines in rest of the system), sn is the

total number of generators in vector sυ , rn is the total number of

generators in vector rυ , n is the total number of generators in the system,

Page 166: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

139

Ω is the kinetic energy decomposition scaling coefficient, m is generator

inertial constant and ω is generator angular velocity. Equation (6.11) shows

that the total kinetic energy is expressed as the sum of the µ cutset kinetic

energy.

The total number of separation µ is derived from

∑==

βυµ

11*)(2

j

njF Cj (6.12)

where β refers to the total number of the types of separation including the

cutsets (ijk) that is not a mode of separation mentioned in association with

equation (6.1).

For the three-machine six-bus system in Figure 6.1, for instance, there are

two types of cutsets; the (ijk) cutset and the cutset (i/jk) or (jk/i). The total

number of the types of separations β including the (ijk) types of cutsets is

2123

12

=

+=

+= trunc

ntruncβ (6.13)

where the truncating function (.)trunc rounds a non-integer to the nearest

integer towards zero.

The notation Cnj 1− in equation (6.12) is a combinatory notation that

evaluates the total number of p or n terms,

( )))!1(()!1(!1

−−−=−

jnjnCn

j (6.14)

Page 167: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

140

and Fυ eliminates any repetition in the evaluation of the total number of p

and n terms,

==<=≤=

= n for evenn for odd

ß for i.k

ß i fork

ß i fork

k

k?

i

i

i

F

50

1

11

β

M (6.15)

Referring to the cutsets in equation (6.1), for instance, vectors sυ and rυ

for each cutset are

[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] B sA s

B sA s

B sA s

3#r3#r

2#r2#r

1#r1#r

3 ?,21?,21 ?,3?

2 ?,31?,31 ?,2?

1 ?,32?,32 ?,1?

====

====

====

(6.16)

Using the notations in equations (6.13 - 6.15), the decomposition scaling

coefficient Ω for total kinetic energy is

[ ]C

nCCCj

nj

jnjnjF

2

1

)1(1

111 )1(2***)(22

−∑

=Ω=

−−−−

βυ

(6.17)

In the next section, we will discuss the decomposition of total potential

energy.

6.2.2. Decomposition of Total Potential Energy

It is well known that the total potential energy [1] consists of energy stored

Page 168: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

141

in transmission lines and shaft energy. The energy stored in the

interconnecting lines between two groups of generators is responsible for

their separation (or cutset), and angle difference terms such as

)cos(cos sij

uijijB θθ − is used to describe this energy. From a cutset

perspective, we define this energy as the cutset potential (line) energy. We

can observe from equation (6.9) that these angle difference terms associate

with the n terms in every cutset. It is recalled that the n terms in every cutset

describe two generators that swing against each other.

Taking the power system in Figure 6.1 as an example, we define a new

cutset notation lij for the cutset potential (line) energy,

)cos(cos sijijijl Bij θθ −= (6.18)

where ij refers to the ith and jth generators.

We sum all cutsets in equation (6.9) in the same way as we did to yield

equation (6.10), except that this time we consider only the n terms.

Replacing the n terms with the new notation in equation (6.18), we arrive at

an algebraic expression for the decomposition of the energy stored in

transmission lines,

( )w

rn

j

sjris

ujrisjris

sn

iwlinepe BV

∑ −∑∑==== 1

)()()()()()(10)(

coscos1

υυυυυυµ

θθτ (6.19)

where B is the admittance from the reduced Y admittance matrix, uθ is the

generator angle, sθ is the generator angle at a stable equilibrium point and τ

Page 169: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

142

is the decomposition scaling coefficient for the energy stored in

transmission lines. The rest of the parameters had been defined earlier in

association with equation (6.11).

Using the notations in equations (6.13 - 6.15), the decomposition scaling

coefficient for the energy stored in lines is

( ))1(4 −Ω= nτ (6.20)

To decompose the total shaft energy, we first define a new cutset notation

iσ for the cutset potential (shaft) energy associated with two groups of

generators,

))(( si

uiiimii gP θθσ −−= (6.21)

where Pmi is the ith generator mechanical power, iig is the shunt

conductance from the reduced Y admittance matrix, uiθ is the ith generator

angle and siθ is the ith generator angle at a stable equilibrium point.

The process of decomposing the total shaft energy is similar to the process

used to decompose the total kinetic energy. We use the mathematical

assumption of the square of the sums and the square of the differences of iσ

to represent the shaft energy associated with the generators that swing in the

same direction and oscillate against each other respectively. A new set of

cutset notation is

Page 170: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

143

( ) ( )22 , jisjis ijij σσσσ −=+= −+ (6.22)

We sum all cutsets in equation (6.9) in the same way as we did to yield

equation (6.10) considering both the p and n terms and replacing them with

the new notation in equation (6.22). As a result, we obtain an algebraic

expression for the decomposition of the total shaft energy

w

rn

jjris

sn

i

snn

ijjrir

snn

i

sn

ijjsis

sn

i

wshaftpeV

∑ −∑+

+∑ +∑+

+∑ +∑

∑=

==

+=

=

+==

=

2

1)()(

1

2

1)()(

1

2

1)()(

1

0)(

)(

)(

)(

1

υυ

υυ

υυ

µ

σσ

σσ

σσ

λ (6.23)

where iσ is described in equation (6.21) and λ is the decomposition

scaling coefficient of the cutset potential (shaft) energy. The rest of the

parameters had been defined earlier in association with equation (6.11).

Using the notations in equations (6.13-6.15), the decomposition scaling

coefficient for the total shaft energy is

2Ω=λ (6.24)

One is to note that the sum of (6.19) and (6.23) results in total potential

energy neglecting the energy loss in transmission lines.

The usefulness of cutset energy helping to identify at which cutset a power

Page 171: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

144

system separates is demonstrated in the following case study 1.

6.3. Weighting of Cutset Energy

After elaborating the decomposition of total energy, this section describes

the concept behind the control strategy of weighting the cutset energy (or

separation energy).

In our earlier section, we have decomposed total energy into key separation

(or cutset) energy using equations (6.11), (6.19) and (6.23). In an n-machine

power system, there are various types of separations and it is common to

describe these separations using the concept of Unstable Equilibrium Points

(UEPs) [3]. Close approximation of UEPs are searched using gradient

methods such as Newton-Raphson and Davidon-Fletcher-Powell methods

[7]. These gradient methods, however, requires initial guesses which can be

derived from the list of possible cutsets in equation (6.1). The initial guesses

for the cutsets in set A are derived from )( siδπ − whereas for the cutsets in

set B, )( siδπ −− [8] is used. Such an approach of obtaining initial guesses is

found satisfactory in yielding the UEPs of a classical model three-machine 9

bus system by verifying the results in a potential energy surface [3]. An

alternative approach to obtain initial guess such as in [9] is also feasible.

The corresponding UEPs for the cutsets in set A and B are

Page 172: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

145

( )( ) for set B

for set A

snsn

sisnnrn

sirn

snrn

sirnnsn

sisn

- ,...,,,...,

- ,...,,,...,

)()()()(

)()()()(

δδδπδπ

δδδπδπ

−−−−

−− (6.25)

Substituting the approximated UEPs into the cutset potential energy

equations in (6.19) and (6.23), the critical cutset potential energy of each

cutset is obtained. This is similar to the concept of using critical potential

energy [4] to predict system instability but in our control application, we

weigh these critical cutset potential energy terms. For the critical cutset

potential energy obtained, we weigh the ith cutset energy

( )ipeikeit VVV ### += based on the proximity of the ith cutset energy to its ith

critical cutset potential energy criipeV # using an exponential weighting,

ii expwt ε−=# (6.26)

where iε is the proximity to critical cutset energy coefficient,

( ) criipeit

criipei VVV ### −=ε

for an ith cutset and iwt # is the weighting of an ith cutset energy itV # . ikeV #

and ipeV # are the respective ith cutset kinetic energy and potential energy.

Page 173: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

146

6.4. Detection of Proximity to Angle Separation Based

on the Boundary of Partly Stable Regions

In this section, we will use UEPs to forewarn and avoid control switching in

partly stable (PS) regions [10]. Its benefit is an extended stability limit as the

available control resources are maximized. In switching control, it is clear

that a PS region [10] exists for every cutset and bang-bang switching inside

such region causes generator angles to hover near a UEP owing to the result

of incorrect switching. These control responses are undesirable and may

result in instability. The use of switching control based on saturation

function also gives rise to undesirable results. In particular, when the control

values [10] reduces during the first swing this can increase the risk of

instability. Although the result of switching between U=-1 and U=1 has

created a PS region, it has also defined an upper and a lower boundary for

the region [10]. These boundaries were conveniently found at the extended

UEP (uepex) and reduced UEP (uepr) respectively. Comparing this reduced

UEP with the system trajectory, it will indicate to us whether the system

trajectory is close to the PS region.

A reduced UEP (uepr) boundary of a PS region in angle space is evaluated

using the norm of the vector. The closeness to angle separation index

iuepprox # becomes

Page 174: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

147

||||||||

][][#

#

##

ruepiruep

i

ruepi

sys

iuepprox θθ

θθ−

⋅= (6.27)

where ][ sysθ is the vector of system trajectory in angle space, ][ #ruep

iθ is the

vector of ith cutset reduced uepr in angle space and |||| #ruep

iθ is the norm of

the vector of ith cutset reduced UEP (uepr) in angle space. As this proximity

indicator iuepprox # approaches zero towards positive values, it means that

the system trajectory in angle space is close to an ith cutset’s PS region.

6.5. A Cutset Based Energy Control that Enhances the

Survival of a Power System

This section elaborates the procedure of designing a cutset energy based

control that aims at high risk separations and yield correctly directed control

efforts during critical instances.

6.5.1. Derivative of Cutset Kinetic Energy

The benefit of energy based control design [5, 6, 10] using remote

measurements in switching control is obvious. It reduces kinetic energy

effectively and gives good performance in damping the subsequent

Page 175: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

148

oscillations. Its control law ensures the most negative derivative of kinetic

energy. A cutset energy based control uses remote measurements and it

extends the benefit of the energy based control.

A wth cutset kinetic energy derivative obtained from equation (6.11) is in

the form of

( )wijijiiwwke gbggufV ∆∆∆−= ,,,,*),(# θθθθ &&& (6.28)

where ijii bg ∆∆ , and ijg∆ are the changes in shunt conductance, transfer

admittance and transfer conductance of the reduced Y admittance matrix, w

is the counting index for the wth cutset and uw is the control value associated

with the wth cutset.

Based on the controllable terms in equation (6.28), the switching surface

#VS of the cutset kinetic energy derivative is

( )∑ ∆∆∆==

µθθ

1# ,,,,

w wijijiiV gbggS & (6.29)

where µ has been defined earlier in association with equation (6.11) and all

parameters has been defined in association with equation (6.28).

6.5.2. Cutset Angle Look-ahead Dependant Terms

Angle look-ahead dependant terms [10] are found to be effective in

switching control where an energy-based velocity control is corrected to

Page 176: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

149

avoid switching in a PS region. The result of finding a partly stable region

(PS) in [10] is based on a Single-Machine-Infinite-Bus (SMIB) system. This

simple SMIB system implied that every cutset had a PS region and

switching inside it must be avoided.

This section proposed a cutset angle look-ahead term to forewarn the

closeness of a system trajectory to the PS region of every cutset using the

result of total energy decomposition. The angle look-ahead dependant terms

based on a SMIB system in [10] are repeated here

∑ ∑

∆+∆−∆=

=

=

=

≠=

2

1

2

1

2 )sin)((n

i

n

ij i

ijijiisii

P m

bgTS

θθθη (6.30)

where SP is a position based switching surface, η is a scaling factor, 2T∆ is

a look-ahead duration, θi is the ith generator angle, θiS is the ith generator

angle at a stable equilibrium point and mi is the ith generator inertial

constant. In equation (6.30), ∆gii and ∆bij are the respective changes in shunt

conductance and admittance of the reduced Y admittance matrix. It should

be noted that the term )sin( ijijii bg θ∆+∆ in equation (6.30) is the change

in the ith generator electrical power eiP∆ .

A general expression of cutset based angle look-ahead term extended from

equation (6.30) for a power system containing multiple cutsets is

Page 177: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

150

( )

w

w

sn

i

rn

jjr

jr

is

is

sjrisjrisjris

wP

m

Pe

m

Pe

B

TS ∑ ∑ ∑

∆−

∆== = =

µ

υ

υ

υ

υ

υυυυυυ θθ

0 1 1)(

)(

)(

)(

)()()()()()(2

# (6.31)

where w counts the wth cutset.

In equation (6.31), wT∆ is the wth cutset look-ahead duration and this is set

according to the wth closeness-to-angle-separation index wuepprox # as

discussed in equation (6.27). This minimizes control chattering inside a PS

region when 0≠θ& [10]

<

>=∆

0 1

0

#

#

wuep

wuepw proxfor

proxforvaluehighT (6.32)

It is important to note that the difference between equations (6.30) and

(6.31) is that equation (6.30) is to be used in a SMIB system since it has

only one mode of separation. However, equation (6.31) can be used in both

SMIB and power system with multiple cutsets.

6.5.3. A Cutset Energy Based Control

Applying the cutset energy weighting in equation (6.26) to both the

derivative of cutset kinetic energy in equation (6.29) and the cutset-based

angle look-ahead in equation (6.31), we have a cutset energy-based

switching surface,

Page 178: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

151

)( #### PV SSwtS += (6.33)

In the next sections, two case studies will be used to elaborate the design of

cutset energy-based control.

Page 179: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

152

6.6. Case Study 1 (Classical Three-machine 9-bus

Power System)

The difficulty in determining the Controlling UEP that is responsible for a

power system separation when power system is subject to severe faults that

could occur anywhere in the transmission network will be illustrated in this

section. In this case study, a three-machine 9-bus power system is used to

illustrate the benefit of using Energy Decomposed to predict system

separations and design the control of SVC devices. As total energy is

decomposed to emphasize the dynamical energy between any two

separating groups of generators (or simply referred to in this thesis as

cutsets), transient energy of all feasible cutsets were evaluated to provide an

overall prediction of system instability due to angle separation.

The three-machine 9-bus system as shown in Figure 6.2 uses classical

machine models and the system data is obtained from [11, Page 38-39]. The

controllable SVC installed at bus 9 is represented by the change in shunt

admittance at bus 8 and is capable of modulating the network power flows.

Generally, the response time of a SVC is less than 30ms and for a SVC light

apparatus it is less than 3ms. In view of this relatively fast response time of

SVC compared to the oscillations frequency in the range of 1.25 to 2.2 Hz,

the SVC dynamics are excluded from the control algorithm. All loads are

represented as constant impedances to emphasize the analysis of generators

Page 180: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

153

interactions.

Pm1 =0.71 H 1 =0.125

3 j0.0625

1.25+j0.5

2

1.04 ∠ 0 °

4

5 6

7 8 9

0.03

2+j0

.161

j0.0576

0.01+j0.085 0.017+j0.092

0.03

9+j0

.17

0.0085+j0.072 0.0119+j0.1008 j0.0586

0.9+j0.3

1.0+j0 .35

1.025 ∠ 9.4 ° 1.025 ∠ 4.7 °

∠ - 2.2 °

∠ - 4.0 ° ∠ - 3.7 °

∠ 3.8 ° ∠ 0.7 ° ∠ 2.0 °

Pm2 =1.63 H 2 =0.03

Pm3 =0.85 H 3 =0.01

1

SVC

Figure 6.2: A three-machine 9-bus system with a controllable SVC installed

at bus 5.

6.6.1. Total Kinetic Energy Reduction Control

The set of swing equation for the three-machine 9-bus system in Figure 6.2

is

coaeem

coaeem

coaeem

PPUPPm

PPUPPm

PPUPPm

−∆−−=

−∆−−=

−∆−−=

33333

22222

11111

δ

δ

δ

&&

&&

&&

(6.34)

where

• mi is the ith generator’s inertial constant,

Page 181: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

154

• iδ&& is the ith generator’s angular acceleration,

• Pmi is the ith generator’s mechanical power output,

• Pei is the ith generator’s electrical power,

• U is the control of the shunt admittance at bus 9,

• ∆Pei is the change in ith generator’s electrical power due to the change in

shunt admittance in the network and

• Pcoa [12] is the centre of area power added to each generator creating the

perfect governor terms to emphasize the study of electromechanical

oscillation.

The ith generator’s electrical power Pe1 and change in power ∆ Pe1 in (6.34)

are

( )

( )∑ ∑ −∆+−∆+∆=∆

∑ ∑ −+−+=

=

=

=

+=

=

=

=

+=

3

1

3

1

2

3

1

3

1

2

)cos()sin(

)cos()sin(

n

i

n

ijjiijjijiijjiiiiei

n

i

n

ijjiijjijiijjiiiiei

gvvbvvgvP

gvvbvvgvP

δδδδ

δδδδ

where

• vi is the ith generator bus voltage,

• bij is the line admittance between the ith and jth generator bus,

• gij is the line conductance between the ith and jth generator bus,

• gii is the shunt conductance at ith generator bus and

• iδ is the ith generator’s angle.

The admittances and conductance are based a reduced Y admittance of the

network eliminating all buses except the generator buses. The ∆ symbol

indicates the corresponding change in the admittances and conductance as

Page 182: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

155

the shunt admittance at bus 9 changes under the control of U from U=0 to

U=±1.

The total kinetic energy of the power system is

233

222

211 2

121

21

ωωω mmmV ++= (6.35)

where ωi is the ith generator’s angular velocity and all parameters has been

defined earlier in association with (6.34).

Taking the derivative of the total kinetic energy V in (6.35) and substituting

the swing equation in (6.34), the derivative of total kinetic energy V& is

( )332211

333222111

),( eee PPPUf

mmmV

∆+∆+∆+=

++=

δδδδδ

δδδδδδ&&&&

&&&&&&&&&& (6.36)

A δ& bang-bang control law based on the total kinetic energy reduction [13]

has the form of

)( Ven SsgnU = and

−<−=>

=1 1

0 0

1 1

V

V

V

en

Sfor

Sfor

Sfor

U (6.37)

where ( ) ( )∑

∑ ∑ ∆+∆+∆=

=≠

=≠

=

n

ii

n

ij

n

ij

ijijijijiiV gbgS1 1 1

cossin δδδ & .

The switching surface VS is derived from the controllable terms (or

function of U) found in the derivative of total kinetic energy.

Page 183: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

156

Before the cutset energy based control law is derived, it is necessary to

illustrate on how the feasible cutsets of the power system are determined.

This can reduce the need to consider the large amount of cutsets when a

large power system such as a 100 machines system was being studied.

6.6.2. Determining Feasible Cutsets and Its Corresponding UEPs

Examining the network structure of Figure 6.2, it is apparent that there are

six possible separations (or cutsets) and each cutset is associated with the

separation between two groups of generators,

Possible cutsets

BBBB

AAAA

3#2#1#0#

3#2#1#0#

)3/12(,)2/13(,)1/23(,)123(

)12/3(,)13/2(,)23/1(,)123( (6.38)

where (i/jk) refers to the separation between the ith machine group and the jth

and kth machine group, and (jjk) refers to no separation between the three

generators.

In (6.38), the difference between a cutset (i/jk) and cutset (jk/i) is their

different potential energy evaluated at their corresponding UEP. The UEP

for the cutset (i/jk) and (jk/i) are found using a gradient search algorithm

such as the Davidon-Fletcher-Powell (DFP) method [7], which requires

initial guesses. These initial guesses for cutsets (i/jk) and (jk/i) are derived

from ( )iδπ − and ( )iδπ −− respectively. The purpose of including the

Page 184: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

157

cutsets (123)#0A and (123)#0B, which are not a mode of separation in the

decomposition, is for the completeness of the decomposition so that energy

decomposition can be validated. The number of feasible cutsets in a power

system is determined by examining the physical structure of the power

system, for example, the power system in Figure 6.2 has six feasible cutsets

Feasible cutsets

BBB

AAA

3#2#1#

3#2#1#

)3/12(,)2/13(,)1/23(

)12/3(,)13/2(,)23/1( (6.39)

One important aspect in determining the number of feasible cutsets amongst

the set of possible cutsets in the power system is to analyze the number of

ways the power system breaks into two groups of coherent generators. For

example, if the lines between bus 8 and 5 of the power system in Figure 6.2

are removed, this longitudinal power system will give four feasible cutsets.

This is because both cutset (3/12) and (12/3) does not result in two separate

groups of coherent generators. From this example, it is apparent that a

longitudinal power system often results in fewer feasible cutsets than a

meshed power system.

Referring to (6.39), given that there are six feasible cutsets, six unstable

operating points are found using the DFP method and are shown in Table

6.1.

Page 185: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

158

δ 21 δ 31 δ 23

cutset(1/23) -3.5719 -3.9126 0.3407 UEP 1

cutset(2/13) 3.2165 1.3582 1.8583 ULM 1

cutset(3/12) 1.2787 3.5598 -2.2811 ULM 2

cutset(23/1) 2.7113 2.3706 0.3407 UEP 2

cutset(13/2) -3.0667 1.3582 -4.4249 ULM 3

cutset(12/3) 1.2787 -2.7234 4.0021 ULM 4

Table 6.1: The relationship between the unstable operating points and

cutsets.

In Table 6.1, UEP refers to the Unstable Equilibrium Point [14] which is an

unstable operating point in the operation of a power system. The remaining

unstable operating points are referred to as unstable local minima (i.e., ULM

refers to Unstable Local minimum) in this thesis as these points are not

equilibrium points since they can not be searched by the Newton-Ralphson

(NR) search algorithm [7]. Generally, a NR algorithm is able to converge to

an unstable operating point starting from an initial nearby point (or guess

point) only if the unstable operating point is an equilibrium point. This

convergence to the equilibrium point occurs only when a solution exists,

which means the power mismatch at the equilibrium point is approximately

zero or close to zero depending on the desire solution tolerance. When a NR

method can only converge to these ULM, it implies that these unstable local

minima are not equilibrium point. This diverging problem in Newton-

Ralpson method is encountered in [15].

Page 186: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

159

The characteristics of UEP and ULM will be elaborated further in the later

sections.

6.6.3. Determining the Cutset Energy Equation

In this section, the construction of cutset energy equation for the three-

machine 9-bus system in Figure 6.2 is explained. Examining (6.38), we

determines the vectors sυ and rυ of each cutset as follows:

[ ] [ ][ ] [ ][ ] [ ][ ] [ ][ ] [ ][ ] [ ]

( )( )( )( )( )( )

3B

2B

1

3

2A

1

r

r

r

r

r

r

23,13,1232,12,1331,21,23

12,23,1313,23,1223,13,12

3 ? 21?32 ? 31?2

1 ? 32?121? 3?3

31? 2?232 ? 1?1

cutsetnnpcutsetnnp

BcutsetnnpAcutsetpnn

cutsetpnnAcutsetpnn

s

s

s

s

s

s

B: cutset B: cutset

B: cutset A: cutset

A: cutset A: cutset

====

====

====

(6.40)

where sυ , rυ has been defined earlier in association with equation (6.11).

Both the n and p terms has been defined earlier in association with equation

(6.3) and are repeated here in (6.41) for easy reference.

( )( )2

2

jjiin

jjiip

mmij

mmij

ωω

ωω

−=

+= (6.41)

The cutset kinetic energy #keV associated with all of the feasible cutsets in

(6.39) can be evaluated from the general algebraic expression in equation

(6.11). The total kinetic energy decomposition scaling coefficient Ω for this

power system is evaluated from (6.17) to be 32=Ω .

Page 187: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

160

The cutset potential (line) energy )(

#line

ipeV associated with the energy stored in

the interconnecting lines between two groups of machines in all of the

feasible cutsets in (6.39) can be evaluated from the general algebraic

expression in equation (6.19). The total potential energy decomposition

scaling coefficient τ for the total energy stored in the transmission lines of

this power system is evaluated from (6.20) to be 4=τ .

The cutset potential (shaft) energy )(

#shaft

ipeV associated with the generators

mechanical power in all of the feasible cutsets in (6.39) can be evaluated

from equation (6.23). The total potential decomposition coefficient λ for

the total shaft energy of this power system is evaluated from (6.24) to be

16=λ .

In the next section, we will explain on how the proximity-to-separation

prediction is being derived.

6.6.4. Determining the Proximity-to-Separation Prediction

The proximity-to-separation prediction involves two processes. One is to

predict the closeness of an ith cutset energy to its ith cutset critical energy

evaluated at its corresponding UEP, and this process is referred to as the

Page 188: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

161

proximity-to-critical cutset energy prediction. This process determines

creditable separations which is similar to the familiar critical energy

approach [16, 17]. The other process predicted how close is a system

trajectory to the boundary of partly stable (PS) regions [10] in angle space

and is referred to as the proximity-to-cutset PS region prediction.

With regards to the proximity-to-critical cutset energy prediction, an ith

cutset energy is evaluated from

)(#

)(###

shaftipe

lineipeikei VVVV −−= (6.42)

where ikeV # , )(

#line

ipeV and )(

#shaft

ipeV has been defined in the earlier section

(3.1.3) as the ith cutset’s kinetic and potential energy. The summation of

)(#

lineipeV and

)(#

shaftipeV forms the ith cutset potential energy.

An ith cutset’s critical energy criipeV # is evaluated from substituting its

associated UEP in the form of ( )233121 ,, δδδ in Table 6.1 into its cutset

potential energy )(

#)(

#shaft

ipeline

ipe VV + , defined earlier in associated with (6.42).

The general algebraic expression of an wth critical cutset potential energy is

Page 189: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

162

∑ ∑

−+

+

+

+∑ ∑

−+

+

−+

+

−∑

=

=

+=

= +=

==

w

snn

i

snn

ij sjr

wuepjrjrm

sir

wuepirirm

sn

i

sn

ij sjs

wuepjsjsm

sis

wuepisism

w

rn

j sjris

wuepjris

jrissn

i

criwpe

P

P

P

P

n

B

V

1 1)()()(

)()()(

1 1)()()(

)()()(

1)()(

)()()()(

1

#

)1(1

cos

cos1

υυυ

υυυ

υυυ

υυυ

υυ

υυυυ

θθ

θθ

θθ

θθ

λ

θ

θ

τ

(6.43)

where the wuepjris )()( υυθ , wuep

is )(υθ and wuepir )(υθ refers to the generator’s

operating angle at the UEP that corresponds to the wth cutset. For instance,

the UEP for cutset (1/23) is described by the unstable operating angles of

( )204.0,5738.3,3335.3 233121 =−=−= δδδ . The symbol w is the counting

index for the wth cutset and the remaining notations has been defined earlier

in association with equations (6.19, 6.21 and 6.23).

The relative angle in COA frame ijθ equals to the relative angle in inertial

frame ijδ . This is shown in

ijji

ji

jiij

ii

coacoa

coacoacoa

coacoa

δδδ

δδδδ

θθθ

δδθ

=−=

+−−=

−=

−=

)()(

)()()(

),()(

(6.44)

Substituting (6.43) into the proximity-to-critical cutset energy coefficient

defined in association with (6.26), the exponential weightings as defined in

Page 190: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

163

(6.26) for each of the feasible cutsets in (6.39) are evaluated continuously

during the transient period. It must be noted that criipeV # is evaluated prior to

the simulation whereas iV# is evaluated continuously during the transient

period.

The proximity-to-cutset PS region prediction differentiates a high-risk

separation from its neighboring low risk separations in angle space. It is

described in the earlier section (6.4) that the reduced UEP is used as the

boundary of a PS region. This three-machine 9-bus power system in Figure

6.2 has the following reduced unstable operating points as shown in Table

6.2.

δ 21 δ 31 δ 23

Reduced unstable

operating points

cutset(1/23) -3.8062 -3.9795 0.1733 UEP1

cutset(2/13) 2.4773 2.3039 0.1734 ULM1

cutset(3/12) 1.3428 3.4655 -2.1227 ULM2

cutset(23/1) 2.477 2.3037 0.1733 UEP2

cutset(13/2) -3.8059 2.3039 -6.1098 ULM3

cutset(12/3) 1.3428 -2.8177 4.1605 ULM4

Table 6.2: The reduced unstable operating points of the power system in

Figure 6.2.

The closeness to angle separation index defined in (6.27) is repeated in

(6.45) for easy reference.

Page 191: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

164

||||||||

][][#

#

##

ruepiruep

i

ruepi

sys

iuepprox θθ

θθ−

⋅= (6.45)

The notations in (6.45) are defined for this power system as

i) 2

233121#

++=

riuepr

iuepriuepruep

i δδδθ is the vector magnitude of an ith

cutset’s reduced UEP in angle space. The symbol riuep

jkδ is the angle

difference between a jth and kth machine associated with an ith cutset’s

reduced UEP obtainable from Table 6.2. For instance, the vector magnitude

of cutset (1/23)’s reduced UEP in angle space is

( )2# 1733.09795.38062.3 +−−=

ruepiθ .

ii) ][ sysθ is the vector of system trajectory in angle space

[ ]Tsystemsystemsystem233121 δδδ and ][ #

ruepiθ is the vector of the ith cutset’s

reduced UEP obtained from Table 6.2

riuepr

iuepriuep

233121 δδδ .

Although ][ #

ruepiθ is evaluated prior to the simulation, equation (6.45) is

continuously evaluated when ][ sysθ changes continuously during the

transient period.

Page 192: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

165

6.6.5. Determining the Cutset Energy Reduction Control

In this section, the use of cutset energy based control consisting of the

derivative of cutset kinetic energy and the cutset based angle look-ahead

control as described in earlier sections is elaborated.

Expanding (6.11), wth cutset kinetic energy for the power system is

w

n

i

n

ijjiji

n

iiiwke mmmV

∑ ∑ ±+∑==

=

=

+=

=

=

3

1

3

1

3

1

2# 2*2

321

ωωω (6.46)

where the ± sign of the second term will follow the sign in the p and n

terms in (6.3) such that a ( )p12 will yield a positive second term (i.e.

+ 21212 ωωmm ) whereas a ( )n12 will result in a negative second term (i.e. -

21212 ωωmm ).

Taking the derivative of the wth cutset kinetic energy and considering only

the controllable terms (or function of U) found in the set of swing equations

in (6.34), the general algebraic equation of the derivative of cutset kinetic

energy is

w

n

iei

i

jej

j

in

ijji

n

ieiiwke P

mP

mmmPuV

∆+∆∑±

∑ ∆=

=

=

=

+=

=

=

3

1

3

1

3

1# 24

321

)(δδ

δ&&

&&

(6.47)

where eiP∆ has been defined earlier in association with (6.34).

In order to maximize the reduction of cutset kinetic energy, a suitable

Page 193: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

166

switching surface #VS that targets control at cutset kinetic energy is

∑==

=

6

1## )(

µ

wwkeV uVS & (6.48)

Considering the cutset-based dependent terms #VS defined in (6.48) and

#PS defined in (6.31) together with the energy-based dependent term VS

defined in (6.37), the complete cutset energy-based control law is

)( ## SSsatU V += and

−<−=>

=1 1

0 0

1 1

#

#

#

#

Sfor

Sfor

Sfor

U (6.49)

where )( #### PV SSwtS += is the cutset-based switching surface defined

in (6.33) and sat(.) is the saturation function proposed in [13].

The next section illustrates the advantage of using cutset energy to predict a

particular separation by comparing the information obtained from total

energy and cutset energy.

6.6.6. Results

Before elaborating on the benefit of using the decomposed energy (i.e.,

cutset energy), the issue of critical energy at an unstable local minimum

(ULM) and the uncertainty in the type of power separations in a multiple

UEPs operating condition are discussed.

Page 194: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

167

6.6.6.1. Energy Evaluated at an Unstable Local Minimum

(ULM)

When severe faults occur at the bus 7 of the three-machine nine-bus system

in Figure 6.2, the critical clearing time (tcr) under no SVC control is 232ms.

As the faults are cleared beyond tcr, the system separated into two groups of

generators; generator 2 and 3 forms a coherent group and is separated from

generator 1. This is shown in Figure 6.3.

Figure 6.3: Unstable system trajectory on a total potential energy surface.

The fault at bus 7 is cleared at 233ms. Under no SVC control, power system

separates at the UEP 2 associated with the cutset (23/1).

In Figure 6.3, UEP refers to Unstable Equilibrium Point and ULM refers to

-5 -4 -3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3 4 5-5

-4

-3

-2

-1

0

1

2

3

4

5

-1.7363-0.770191.162

0.19592

1.162

1.162

1.162

-2.7024

3.0943

2.1282

2.1282

2.1282

0.19592

-1.7363

1.162

-0.77019

3.0943

3.0943

0.19592

2.1282

3.0943

1.162

4.0604

0.19592

4.0604

4.0604

2.1282

5.0265

1.162

4.0604

5.0265

Total potential energy surface

δ 21

5.9926

5.9926

7.9249

3.0943

2.1282

5.02655.9926

8.891

4.0604

6.9588

6.9588

5.0265

9.8571

7.92498.891

6.9588

9.8571

9.8571

6.9588

7.9249

δ31

UEP 2

ULM 1

ULM 2

UEP 1 ULM 3

ULM 4

SEP

ULM of cutset (2/13) UEP of cutset (1/23) ULM of cutset (3/12) Initial guess points System trajectory w/o SVC control

Page 195: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

168

Unstable Local Minima defined earlier in association with Table 6.1. The

difference between a UEP and ULM is that a system trajectory in angle

space has approximately zero acceleration at UEP and non-zero acceleration

at a ULM. These are clarified in earlier section that the failure of Newton-

Raphson method to converge on a ULM has indicated non-zero acceleration

at a ULM.

The power system separation at the UEP 2 associated with the cutset (23/1)

is observed in Figure 6.4 in the form of relative angles. In Figure 6.4, the

relative angle between generator 1 and 2 ( 21δ ) increases while the relative

angle between generator 2 and 3 ( 23δ ) remains relatively small as generator

1 separates from the rest of the power system.

Figure 6.4: Relative angles show the power system separation between

generator 1 and the rest of the system. The fault at bus 7 was cleared at

0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2

-2

-1

0

1

2

3

4

5δ 21δ 32

Mac

hine

ang

le d

iffer

ence

s (r

ad.)

Time (sec.)

Page 196: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

169

233ms.

Observing the power system in Figure 6.2, the fault at bus 7 is most likely to

cause generator 2 to separate from the rest of the system. It is seen in the

total potential energy surface that the system trajectory is driven towards the

ULM 1 during the fault duration intending to cause a power system at the

cutset (2/13). However, a counter intuitive separation occurs at cutset (23/1)

instead.

Using the concept of the Controlling UEP in the direction of a fault

trajectory [17] and the critical energy at a UEP [18], we seek to understand

the characteristic of Unstable Local Minima (ULMs).

When the fault at bus 7 is cleared at a long fault clearing time of 300ms, it is

intended to cause the post-fault energy to exceed the energy evaluated at a

ULM 1 and is supposed to cause a separation at cutset (2/13), since a

Controlling UEP in the direction of the fault trajectory should result in a

separation pattern associated with the Controlling UEP. However, it turns

out that the post-fault total energy exceeds both the energy evaluated at UEP

2 and ULM 1, and generator 1 has separated from the rest of the power

system (i.e. cutset (23/1)). This implied that the ULM 1 (i.e. cutset (2/13)) is

not the Controlling UEP and the energy evaluated at ULM 1 is not a critical

energy. It appears that UEP 2 is the Controlling UEP. The result of

generator angles is shown in Figure 6.5.

Page 197: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

170

Figure 6.5: Generator angles are separating when the fault at bus 7 is cleared

at 300ms. Cutset (1/23) or (23/1) is confirmed as the only separation

possible for the power system.

Similarly, when the fault at bus 9 is cleared at 300ms which is intended to

cause the energy evaluated at ULM 2 to be exceeded and a separation at the

cutset (3/12), it turns out that the post-fault energy exceeds both the energy

evaluated at UEP 2 and ULM 2, and generator 1 has separated from the rest

of the power system (i.e. cutset (23/1)). The unstable system trajectory in

the potential energy surface is shown in Figure 6.6.

0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1-4

-2

0

2

4

6

8

10 δ δ δ

123

Mac

hine

ang

les

(rad

.)

Time (sec.)

Page 198: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

171

Figure 6.6: Unstable system trajectory on a total potential energy surface.

The Fault at bus 9 is cleared at 300ms. Under no SVC control, power

system separates at the UEP 2 associated with the cutset (23/1).

The above exercises suggest that the power system in Figure 6.2 appears to

have only one type of power system separation which is associated with

UEP 2 or UEP 1. It is also suggested that ULM is not a feasible cutset

because a power system would have already been separated at a UEP before

the system trajectory reaches close to a ULM.

In the next section, the uncertainty of separation in a multiple UEP

environment is discussed.

-5 -4 -3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3 4 5-5

-4

-3

-2

-1

0

1

2

3

4

5

-1.7363-0.770191.162

0.19592

1.1621.162

1.162

-2.7024

3.0943

2.1282

2.1282

2.1282

0.19592

-1.7363

1.162

-0.77019

3.0943

3.0943

0.19592

2.1282

3.0943

1.162

4.0604

0.19592

4.0604

4.0604

2.1282

5.0265

1.162

4.0604

5.0265

Total potential energy surface

δ21

5.9926

5.9926

7.9249

3.0943

2.1282

5.0265

5.9926

8.891

4.0604

6.9588

6.9588

5.0265

9.8571

7.92498.891

6.9588

9.8571

9.8571

6.9588

7.9249

δ31 UEP 2

ULM 1

ULM 2

UEP 1 ULM 3

ULM 4

SEP

Page 199: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

172

6.6.6.2. The Uncertainty of Power System Separations in a

Multiple UEPs Operating Condition

In this section, the system data of the three-machine system in Figure 6.2 is

modified to yield six UEPs by reducing the loading on the transmission

lines between bus 5 & 7 and bus 6 & 9. The generators’ mechanical power

(Pmi), generators’ bus voltages (vi) and generators’ bus angle are shown in

Table 6.3.

Pm1= 1.34 Pm2= 1.20 Pm3= 0.62

v1= 1.0∠0° v2= 1.025∠0.9° v3= 1.025∠2.2°

Table 6.3: System data of Figure 6.2 are modified to reduce the loading of

lines between bus 5 & 7 and bus 6 & 9. This modified loading yields six

UEPs.

These six UEPs are shown in Table 6.4.

δ 21 δ 31 δ 23

cutset(1/23) -3.3253 -3.5602 0.2349 UEP 1

cutset(2/13) 3.3681 1.145 2.2231 UEP 2

cutset(3/12) 0.8111 3.4106 -2.5995 UEP 3

cutset(23/1) 2.9579 2.723 0.2349 UEP 4

cutset(13/2) -2.9151 1.145 -4.0601 UEP 5

cutset(12/3) 0.8111 -2.8726 3.6837 UEP 6

Table 6.4: The relationship between the Unstable Equilibrium Points

(UEPs) and cutsets.

Page 200: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

173

Before we illustrates the purpose of this section (i.e. the uncertainty in the

types of separations in a multiple UEP environment), we examine the

concept of Controlling UEP in the direction of fault trajectory using this

configuration of power dispatch.

When the fault at bus 7 is cleared at 400ms with the intention to cause the

separation at cutset (2/13), the concept of Controlling UEP in the direction

of fault trajectory concept is verified. The result as shown in Figure 6.7

agrees with the above mentioned concept and the power system has

separated at cutset (2/13).

Figure 6.7: Unstable system trajectory on a total potential energy surface.

The Fault at bus 7 is cleared at 400ms. Under no SVC control, power

system separates at the UEP 2 associated with the cutset (23/1).

-5 -4 -3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3 4 5-5

-4

-3

-2

-1

0

1

2

3

4

5

1.41790.815150.21239

2.0207

2.6234

2.0207

1.41792.0207

0.81515

0.21239

2.0207

1.4179

0.81515

2.6234

0.81515

2.6234

1.4179

2.6234

1.41792.0207

2.6234 2.0207

3.2262

3.2262

3.2262

0.21239

2.6234

1.4179

0.81515

2.62343.829

3.829

3.829

3.829

2.0207

3.2262

4.4317

2.6234

3.2262

3.8293.2262

2.6234

4.4317

3.2262

4.4317

3.2262

4.4317

4.4317

3.2262

5.0345

5.0345

5.6372

5.6372

4.4317

6.24

3.829

5.0345

5.6372

7.4455

4.4317

6.8428

5.0345

6.24

6.24

4.4317

5.0345

5.6372

6.8428

7.4455

7.4455

6.8428

6.24

6.24

6.24

6.24

UEP 3

Total potential energy surface

δ31

δ 21

UEP 2 UEP 4 SEP

UEP 6 UEP 1

UEP 5

Page 201: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

174

When the fault at bus 9 is cleared at 400ms, the power system separates at

the UEP3 which agrees with the concept of Controlling UEP in the direction

of fault trajectory. This example of simulating the fault at bus 9 and has

suggested that all UEP are feasible separations.

The following part of this section illustrates that in a multiple UEP

environment, the concept of Controlling UEP in the direction of a fault

trajectory appears flawed. Prior to performing a short-circuit test on bus 9, it

is obvious that the fault at bus 9 is most likely to cause generator 3 to

separate from the rest of the system. When the fault at bus 9 is cleared at

463ms, the system trajectory is being driven towards UEP 2 but results in a

separation associated with cutset (3/12). The result of an angle separation at

cutset (3/12) due to a long fault clearing time of 463ms is shown in Figure

6.8 which agrees with the concept of the Controlling UEP in the direction of

fault trajectory [17].

Page 202: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

175

Figure 6.8: Separation of generator 3 from the rest of the system associates

with cutset (3/12). The Fault at bus 9 is cleared at 463ms.

However, when the fault at bus 9 is cleared at a critical fault clearing time of

381ms, the power system does not separate at cutset (3/12) instead the

power system separates at cutset (2/13). The result is shown in Figure 6.9.

This uncertainty in the mode of separation is referred to as the shifting of

modes in this thesis.

In Figure 6.9, it is apparent that a control that aims at a Controlling UEP in

the direction of a simulated fault trajectory by considering its critical energy

is undesirable. One desirable way of overcoming this shifting of modes is to

consider all UEPs in the development of the control strategy. However, this

suggestion has its limitation when total energy is used as the design

framework. It is understandable when we look at the total energy diagram in

0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1 1.1

-2

0

2

4

6

8

Time (sec.)

Mac

hine

ang

le (

rad.

)

δ1 δ2 δ3

Page 203: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

176

Figure 6.10. (Note: Figure 6.10 does not include the energy dissipated in the

network transfer conductance.)

Figure 6.9: System trajectory on potential energy surface. The fault at bus 9

is cleared at 381ms and an unexpected separation associated with cutset

(2/13) occurs.

The total energy diagram in Figure 6.10 offers no specific information

pertaining to how the power system separates. It becomes difficult when one

needs to design a control that aims at a separation. This control design

objective becomes exacerbated given a multi-machine system in which

several possible separations can be encountered. The next section illustrates

how cutset energy could alleviate these difficulties.

-5 -4 -3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3 4 5-5

-4

-3

-2

-1

0

1

2

3

4

5

1.4179 0.81515

0.21239

2.0207

2.6234

1.4179

2.0207 1.4179

2.0207

0.81515

0.81515

0.21239

2.0207

2.6234

2.6234

1.4179

0.81515 1.4179 2.0207

2.6234 2.6234

3.829

2.0207

3.2262

3.2262

3.2262 2.6234

0.81515

2.6234

3.829

3.829

4.4317

1.4179 2.0207

3.2262

2.6234

3.829

3.2262

2.6234 3.2262

3.8294.4317

3.2262

4.4317

3.2262

4.4317

4.4317

4.4317

3.2262 3.829

5.0345

5.0345 6.24

5.0345

5.6372

6.8428

4.4317

5.6372

7.4455

6.24

5.0345

6.24

5.6372

6.8428

4.4317 5.0345

5.6372

6.8428

7.4455

6.24

7.4455

6.24

6.24

6.24

UEP 3

UEP 2

UEP 6

UEP 1

UEP 5

SEP UEP 4

δ21

δ31

Page 204: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

177

Figure 6.10: The total energy diagram shows the difficulty of determining

when the power system has separated. The fault at bus 9 is cleared at

381ms.

6.6.6.3. The Ease of Using Cutset Energy to Predict a Potential

Separations

The ability of cutset energy to predict which type of separation that is most

likely to occur is an advantage that should be exploited. Referring to the

case associated with Figure 6.7, the cutset energy of the six types of

separations are shown in Figure 6.11.

0.2

0.4

0.6

0.8

1 1.2

1.4

0

1

2

3

4

5

Time (sec.)

Ene

rgy

Total energy Total potential energy Total kinetic energy Critical energy at UEP4 Critical energy at UEP2 Critical energy at UEP3

Page 205: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

178

Figure 6.11: Cutset energy responsible for the various types of separations.

The fault at bus 9 is cleared at 381ms. The power system separated at the

UEP 2.

In Figure 6.11, “cutset energy 1” describes the transient energy associated

with the separation between generator 1 and the rest of the system (i.e.

cutset (1/23) & (23/1)). The “Cutset energy 2” describes the transient energy

associated with the separation between generator 2 and the rest of the

system (i.e. cutset (2/13) & (13/2)) whereas “cutset energy 3” describes the

transient energy associated with the separation between generator 3 and the

rest of the system (i.e. cutset (3/12) & (12/3)).

It is observed that “cutset energy 1” is dangerously close to its critical cutset

energy evaluated at UEP 4 at around 1s when “cutset energy 2” and “cutset

energy 3” are less critical since they are far from their critical cutset energy

0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1 1.2 1.4 0

0.2

0.4

0.6

0.8

1

1.2

1.4

1.6

1.8

Time (sec.)

Cutset energy and critical cutset energy

cutset energy 1 cutset energy 2 cutset energy 3 critical cutset energy at UEP 1critical cutset energy at UEP 4critical cutset energy at UEP 2critical cutset energy at UEP 5critical cutset energy at UEP 3critical cutset energy at UEP 6

Cut

set e

nerg

y

Page 206: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

179

evaluated at their corresponding UEPs. As time progresses, generator 2 had

separates from the rest of the system at around 1.2s which is when the

“cutset energy 2” exceeds its critical cutset energy evaluated at UEP 2. This

is observed in Figure 6.12.

Figure 6.12: Generator 2 has separated from the rest of the system at around

1.2s which is predicted by the “cutset energy 2” associated with cutset

(2/13).

6.6.6.4. The value of cutset energy control

From the earlier sections, it is realized that it is difficult to predict which

types of power system separations will occur when severe faults are

0 0.5 1 1.5 2-4

-3

-2

-1

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

δ (

rad.

)

Time (sec.)

δ1δ2δ3

Mac

hine

ang

le,

Generator separates from the rest of the system

Page 207: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

180

encountered in the power system. The undesirable consequences include the

hovering behavior of machine angles near UEPs, as shown in Figure 6.9. It

is also understood from the earlier sections that it is difficult to predict the

types of power system separations that are likely to occur from total energy.

Hence, using total energy to derive the switching control law leading to the

energy control Uen as defined in (6.37) will be less than perfect. In this

section, we will illustrate the problem of the energy control Uen at post-fault

and the result of cutset energy control U# as defined in (6.49) in solving this

problem.

When the fault at bus 9 is cleared at a critical clearing time of 390.4ms, the

system trajectory survives the separation at cutset (2/13) and hovers near the

UEPs (i.e. the system trajectory hovers near the boundary of the region of

attraction). This undesirable effect as shown in Figure 6.13 may lead to a

separation at either the cutset (23/1) or (2/13) which is easily understood by

observing the potential energy surface diagram in Figure 6.9. On the

contrary, when the cutset energy control U# is used instead of the energy

control Uen, the problem of machine angles hovering near UEPs is avoided.

The result of U# control is shown in Figure 6.13 to enable a comparison

with that of the Uen control.

Page 208: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

181

Figure 6.13: The system trajectory that is controlled using Uen (dashed) and

U# (solid line with dots) are shown on the potential energy surface. The

Fault at bus 9 is cleared at 390.4ms.

The hovering of machine angles near UEPs when the Uen control is used can

be observed from the machine angles in Figure 6.14. In Figure 6.14,

machine angle 1 and 2 hovers for a longer time than machine angle 3 when

the system trajectory is much closer to the UEP 2 and 4 respectively. This is

because the energy control Uen does not yield the correct switching control

when the system trajectory is near these UEPs instead it operates in linear

region at the crucial instances of first swing. The switching of control values

for Uen is shown in Figure 6.15.

The result of U# control is also shown in Figure 6.14 where it is obvious that

-5 -4 -3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3 4 5-5

-4

-3

-2

-1

0

1

2

3

4

5

1.41790.81515

0.21239

2.0207

2.6234

1.4179

2.02071.4179

2.0207

0.81515

0.81515

0.212392.0207

2.6234

2.6234

1.4179

0.815151.41792.020

7 2.6234

2.6234

3.829

2.0207

3.2262

3.2262

3.2262

2.6234

0.81515

2.6234

3.829

3.829

4.4317

1.41792.0207

3.2262

2.6234

3.829

3.2262

2.62343.2262

3.8294.4317

3.2262

4.4317

3.2262

4.4317

4.4317

4.4317

3.2262

3.829

5.0345

5.03456.24

5.0345

5.6372

6.8428

4.4317

5.6372

7.4455

6.24

5.0345

6.24

5.6372

6.8428

4.43175.0345

5.6372

6.8428

7.4455

6.24

7.4455

6.24

6.24

6.24

Total potential energy surface

δ21

δ31

UEP 3

UEP 2

UEP 6 UEP 1

UEP 5

SEP

UEP 4

Trajectory due to cutset energy control

Trajectory due toEnergy control

Page 209: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

182

this control avoids the hovering of the machine angles. In general, both the

Uen and U# controls has similar performance when it comes to the damping

of subsequent oscillations.

Figure 6.14: The response of machine angles under the influence of Uen

(dotted) and U# (solid) controls. The Fault at bus 9 is cleared at 390.4ms.

(a): The effect of Uen (dotted) and U# (solid) controls on machine angle 1.

(b): The effect of Uen (dotted) and U# (solid) controls on machine angle 2.

(c): The effect of Uen (dotted) and U# (solid) controls on machine angle 3.

It is obvious from the comparison of the switching of control values

between Uen and U# controls as shown in Figure 6.15 that the U# control has

applied different phase shifts near the three main UEPs (i.e. UEP 2, 3 and 4)

at appropriate timings to avoid the PS regions of these UEPs. The U# control

has this ability to recognize the different types of cutsets because its control

law is derived from the cutset energy instead of total energy. It is evident

from our earlier discussion that total energy lacks the information on power

0 2 4 6 8 10 -1

0

1

δ1 (

rad.

)

0 2 4 6 8 10 -5

0

5

δ2

(rad

.)

0 2 4 6 8 10 -5

0

5

Time (sec.)

δ3

(rad

.)

Page 210: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

183

system separations.

Figure 6.15: The switching of control values for the Uen (dotted) and U#

(solid) controls.

The cutset energy representing the different cutsets (or power system

separations) when the SVC in the power system is being controlled using

Uen is shown in Figure 6.16. In Figure 6.16, we observes that both the

“cutset energy 1” associated with cutset (23/1) and “cutset energy 2”

associated with cutset (2/13) are close to their respective critical cutset

energy. This implies that the power system may separate at either UEP 4 or

UEP 2.

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10-1

-0.5

0

0.5

1

Con

trol U

en

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10-1

-0.5

0

0.5

1

Time (sec.)

Con

trol U

#

Page 211: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

184

Figure 6.16: Cutset energy of the power system when the energy control Uen

is used. The fault at bus 9 is cleared at 390.4ms.

The influence of U# control on the power system is shown in Figure 6.17. It

is obvious that the “cutset energy 1” associated with cutset (23/1) has been

reduced owing to the appropriate phase being introduced at the crucial time

of first swing. The consequences of the reduced “cutset energy 1” has

resulted in a substantial reduction in the “cutset energy 2”.

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0

0.2

0.4

0.6

0.8

1

1.2

1.4

1.6

Time (sec.)

Cut

set e

nerg

y

Cutset energy and critical cutset energy

cutset energy1cutset energy2cutset energy3critical cutset energy at UEP 1critical cutset energy at UEP 4 critical cutset energy at UEP 2critical cutset energy at UEP 5critical cutset energy at UEP 3critical cutset energy at UEP 6

Page 212: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

185

Figure 6.17: Cutset energy of the power system when the energy control U#

is used. The fault at bus 9 is cleared at 390.4ms.

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0

0.2

0.4

0.6

0.8

1

1.2

1.4

1.6

Time (sec.)

Cutset energy and critical cutset energy

cutset energy1cutset energy2cutset energy3critical cutset energy at UEP 1critical cutset energy at UEP 4 critical cutset energy at UEP 2critical cutset energy at UEP 5critical cutset energy at UEP 3critical cutset energy at UEP 6

Cut

set e

nerg

y

Page 213: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

186

6.7. Case Study 2 (Detailed Six-machine 21-bus Power

System)

In this case study, a six-machine 21-one bus longitudinal power system

using detailed machine model is used as shown in Figure 6.18. The system

data for the detailed machine models and line parameters are obtained from

[19] with the line reactance between bus 18 and 19 being modified to 0.488

per unit to demonstrate the control of a stressed power system using cutset

energy based control. This case study is used to demonstrate the

performance of the cutset energy based control in retaining synchronism

when compared against two different SVC controls; the energy based

approach [5, 6, 13] using remote measurements and the mode frequency

tuning approach using local measurements. The study of relaying

coordination and short-time rating of 275KV transmission lines, for

example, due to power swings are not within the scope of this chapter. The

main objective of the case study in this chapter is to emphasize the

importance of improving the synchronization amongst generators in order to

yield a significant improvement in the transfer capacity of transmission

network. In this example, the control of SVC devices is based on the

proximity-to-separation strategies and Energy Decomposition. This

improved transfer capacity demonstrates the ability of this control

methodology to maximize the use of existing assets in extending the

transient stability limits of the power systems.

Page 214: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

187

As the cutset energy-based control and energy-based control uses remote

measurements, time delay in data transmission is unavoidable. The time

delay in these remote measurements based on Global Positioning System

(GPS) synchronization using ground based communication is expected to be

less than 30ms for a typical data transmission distance of 2000km. These

delays are to be neglected considering its insignificant influences in the

control of 1.5 to 1.8 Hz oscillations. The SVC dynamics describing the

implementation of the controllable reduced Y admittance is neglected in this

chapter as the response time of a typical SVC is approximately 2 cycles for

small changes and 1 cycle for major changes.

Figure 6.18: A six-machine 21-bus test system with Left side of the

generations far from the Central and Right areas.

In this case study, the performances of cutset energy-based control such as

that derived in equation (6.49) for the three-machine 9-bus system are

1

5

6

7

8

12

21 Swing bus H 1 =10.47

Pm 2 =5.3 H 2 =10.47

Pm 3 =6.0 H 3 =10.47

Pm 4 =6.0 H 4 =10.47

Pm 5 =0.8 H 5 =2.47

Pm 6 =0.8 H 6 =2.47

Right Central Left

∠ 0.0 °

∠ - 37 °

∠ - 37 ° ∠ - 38 °

∠ - 38 ° 2 9 ∠ -3.5 °

∠ - 9.2 °

∠ - 25 °

∠ - 18 ° ∠ - 25 ° 3 10

13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

15+j4.93 - j2.3 4.4+j1.6 5+j1.6 - j1.3 - j2.0

svc svc

∠ - 22 ° ∠ - 18 ° ∠ - 15 ° ∠ - 12 °

∠ - 17 °

∠ - 33 ° ∠ - 44 ° ∠ - 39 °

∠ - 6.4 ° 4 11

∠ - 18 ° ∠ - 25 ° 1

5

6

7

8

12

21 Swing bus H 1 =10.47

Pm 2 =5.3 H 2 =10.47

Pm 3 =6.0 H 3 =10.47

Pm 4 =6.0 H 4 =10.47

Pm 5 =0.8 H 5 =2.47

Pm 6 =0.8 H 6 =2.47

Right Central Left

∠ 0.0 °

∠ - °

∠ - ° ∠ - °

∠ - ° 2 9 ∠

∠ - °

∠ - ° ∠ - 25 ° 3 10

13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

- - j1.3 - j2.0

∠ - ° ∠ - ° ∠ - ° ∠ - °

∠ - °

∠ - ° ∠ - ° ∠ - °

∠ - ° 4 11

∠ - ° ∠ - 25 °

Page 215: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

188

compared against two other forms of control algorithm.

For the energy based control, referred to as the Uen control, or simply

referred to as (energy) in this thesis, it is derived based on [13] having a

control law of

) sat (SU Ven = and

−<−≤≤−>

=1 1

11 1 1

SforSforSSfor

Uen (6.50)

where the switching surface SV is

∑ ∑ ∆+∑ ∆+∆==

=

•=

≠=

=

≠=

6

1

6

1

6

1)cossin(

n

iiij

n

ij

ijn

ij

ijijiiV gbgS δθθ (6.51)

For the mode frequency tuning approach referred to as the Umode control, or

simply referred to as (mode) in this thesis, it aims at two mode frequencies

of approximately 9.8 rad/sec. and 11 rad/sec., which coarsely associated

with the separation at the Right-Central link and the Left-Central link. The

9.8 rad/sec mode frequency is obtained from the eigenvalues of the

perturbed system in Figure 6.18 when a SVC (–j1.3) is placed at bus 13. The

11 rad/sec. mode frequency is obtained when a SVC (-j2.0) is placed at bus

18. It is found to be effective when each SVC is assigned to handle a mode.

The local measurements of the real power flows on line 18-19 and line 13-

14 feeding through a 90° phase shift block as shown in Figure 6.19

approximate a velocity and positional feedback control. As shown in Figure

6.19, the real power (Powerij) and voltage (vi) measurements at bus 18 and

Page 216: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

189

13 are used for the control of SVC installed at bus 18 and 13 respectively.

This block diagram is derived from the excitation controller with stabilizer

signal as used in [20].

Figure 6.19: SVC control using local measurements of power and voltage to

approximate a velocity and positional feedback.

For the cutset energy-based control referred to as the U#, or simply referred

to as (cutset) in this thesis, it uses both switching surface #S (6.33) and VS

(6.51) forming the control law of

( ))( ##### PVVV SSwtSsat) Ssat (SU ++=+= (6.52)

and

( )( ) ( )

( )

−<+−≤+≤−+

>+

=1 1

1 1

1 1

#

##

#

#

SSforSSforSS

SSfor

U

V

VV

V

(6.53)

It is found that the clearing of the severe fault at bus 12 by tripping one of

the parallel lines between bus 12 and 13 excites two inter-area modes; one

mode of separation is associated with the oscillation between the Right and

2) 100( + s

K1sPoweri j

2) 100( + s

Poweri j+ -

Vi

Vref + - K2

modeU

Page 217: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

190

Central-Left areas while the other is associated with the oscillation between

the Left and Central-Right areas. The results of using no control (0) and

using different control approaches of Umode (mode), Uen (energy) or U#

(cutset) are shown in Figure 6.20 with one of the lines between bus 12 and

13 cleared at 150 ms. As it is found that local area modes in the Left area

(i.e., involving generator 5 and 6), Central area (i.e., involving generators 1

and 2) and Right area (i.e., involving generators 3 and 4) are not excited,

they are not shown. Instead, the inter-area modes (in the range of 1.5 to 1.8

Hz); one associated with the Central and Left areas oscillation and the other

associated with the Central and Right areas oscillation, are shown in Figure

6.20.

Figure 6.20: COA angle difference for the Central-Right area (dotted lines)

and the Central-Left area (solid lines) under the influence of different SVC

0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20

0

1

2

0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20

0

1

2

0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20

0

1

2

CO

A a

ngle

diff

eren

ce,

δ ij/

kh (

radi

ans)

0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20

0

1

2

Time (sec.)

(a)

(b)

(c)

(d)

Page 218: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

191

controls. Line trips at 150ms for the fault at bus 12.

(a): Under no control (0),

(b): SVCs control using the (mode) control.

(c): SVCs control using the (energy) control.

(d): SVCs control using the (cutset) control.

The angle difference between the Central and Left area is represented by

34/12δ in Central-of-area [12] (COA) frame whereas 56/12δ represents the

Central and Right areas interaction in COA frame. They are evaluated from

hk

hhkk

ji

jjiikhij mm

mmmm

mm

++

−+

+=

δδδδδ

****/ (6.54)

It is obvious that all control approaches are capable of damping the

subsequent oscillations satisfactorily. In the “no control” case in Figure

6.20, beating phenomena are observed as a lower frequency component that

is formed when certain frequency components in the power system vanishes

intermittently [21]. These beating phenomena does not influence the

damping performance of the SVCs, particularly in the case of the (mode)

control, since the control of each SVC is designed separately to target the

specific oscillations. In terms of the general damping performance, energy-

based (energy) and cutset energy-based (cutset) controls gives a better result

than the (mode) control. A comparison between the (energy) and (cutset)

controls shows that the energy-based and cutset energy-based controls have

insignificant differences when the system is not in danger of separating.

Considering the retention of synchronism (or the survival of a power

Page 219: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

192

system) in relation to the maximization of control resources, the cutset

energy based (cutset) control outperforms the rest of the controls in

preventing a power system separation. The results of two inter-area modes

under different controls are shown in Figure 6.21 for the fault at bus 12 and

line cleared at 200ms.

Figure 6.21: COA angle difference for the Central-Right area (dotted lines)

and the Central-Left area (solid lines) under the influence of different SVC

controls. Line trips at 200ms for the fault at bus 12.

(a): Under no control (0),

(b): SVCs control using the (mode) control.

(c): SVCs control using the (energy) control.

(d): SVCs control using the (cutset) control.

0 1 2 3 4 5 6

0 2 4

0 1 2 3 4 5 6

0 2 4

0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1 1.2 1.4

0 2 4

CO

A a

ngle

diff

eren

ce,

δ ij/kh

(ra

dian

s)

0 1 2 3 4 5 6-10 1 2

Time (sec.)

(a)

(b)

(c)

(d)

Page 220: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

193

A comparison between Figure 6.20d and 6.21d has shown that a prolonged

tripping of one of the lines between bus 12 and 13 causes greater excursion

of generator angles. These results of large angle swings are, however,

correctly synchronized under the control of SVCs using (cutset) control. The

control responses associated with the fourth plot of Figure 6.21 is shown in

Figure 6.22.

Figure 6.22: Responses of SVC controls at bus 18 and bus 13. Line trips at

200ms for a fault at bus 12. SVC installed at bus 18 and 13 respond to the

inter-area mode associated with the Central-Left area (solid line) and the

Central-Right area (dotted line) respectively.

In Figure 6.22, both the SVC installed at bus 18 and 13 respond strongly

during the first one and a half seconds as the respective control values (U18

and U13) saturates to yield the maximum control. As time progressed, the

0 1 2 3 4 5 6-1

-0.5

0

0.5

1 SVC control at bus 18 (U18)

0 1 2 3 4 5 6-1

-0.5

0

0.5

1

SVC control at bus 13 (U13)

Time (sec.)Res

pons

es o

f SV

C c

ontr

ols

usin

g th

e (c

utse

t) c

ontr

ol

Page 221: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

194

separation risk at the Central-Right area becomes less serious than that at

the Central-Left area as the SVC at bus 18 saturates for another second. This

strong response of U18 to the inter-area mode associated with the Central-

Left area agrees with the SVC placement concept in [22].

A comparison between Figure 6.22 and Figure 6.21d shows that when the

faults at bus 12 are most likely to break the Central-Right link around 0.4s,

the SVC at bus 13 saturates (i.e., U=1) to synchronize the Central and Right

areas. At around 0.6s as the Central-Left link is close to separation, SVC at

bus 18 remains at U=1 to synchronize the Central and Left areas while the

SVC at bus 12 reduces its strength to coordinate in the saving of the two

areas. This case study has highlighted that apart from emphasizing the

probable separation at the Central-Right link due to the faults at bus 12, it is

also essential to direct the control to the separation that is associated with

another weak link (i.e. Central-Left area). A cutset-based energy control

using the benefits of decomposed energy is capable of achieving these

demanding control requirements. Next, we consider the benefits of the

extended transient stability limits from the investment perspective.

In practice, it is difficult to visualize the benefit of the extended stability

limits expressed in critical fault clearing time. A familiar way of quantifying

the transient stability limits maximized from the use of different controls is

shown in Figure 6.23. A familiar way of quantifying the transient stability

limits maximized from the use of different controls is shown in Figure 6.23.

Page 222: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

195

This figure compares the improvement provided by different forms of

controllers showing the improvement from the different control approaches.

This means if we double the size of the controller, we can double the actual

improvement but we expect to retain the same relative benefit through the

use of advanced control.

Relative to a fault clearing time, the comparisons between the no control

case (0) and the three controlled cases has shown that using a cutset energy-

based (cutset), energy (energy) and mode (mode) controls, the increased

transfer between bus 18 and 19 is 3.5%, 2.1% and 2.7% respectively. The

fault clearing time considered has neglected the possibility of high short-

circuit current at these transient stability limits which may or may not

exceed the short-time short-circuit rating and thermal rating of Extra High

Voltage lines.

2.6 2.8 3 3.2 3.4 3.6 3.8 4 4.20.06

0.08

0.1

0.12

0.14

0.16

0.18

0.2

0.22 no control(energy) control(cutset) control(mode) control

Crit

ical

faul

t cle

arin

g tim

e, tc

l (se

c.)

Power flow between bus 18 and 19, (P18-19) per unit

A fault clearing time of 80ms

Page 223: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

196

Figure 6.23: Quantifying the transient stability limits of the power system

under different SVC controls. One of the parallel lines between bus 12 and

13 is removed for the fault at bus 12. P18-19 refers to the steady state power

flow.

This improvement in transfer capacity depends on the size of the SVCs. The

use of (mode) control increases the benefit of the SVCs by a factor of 1.2 as

compared with the (energy) control whereas the advanced cutset energy-

based control improves the benefit of the SVC by a further 120% relative to

the (mode) control. Thus for this example, a cutset energy-based SVC of 2/3

of its size can achieve the stability improvement provided by the

conventionally controlled SVC.

In this case study, although the use of (mode) control results in a

comparatively higher transient stability limit than (energy) control, as

shown in Figure 6.23, by synchronizing generators at first swing, this

synchronization feature of the (mode) control is sometime unreliable

because the selection of K2 (Figure 6.19) involves the trying out of a range

of K2. Generally, K2 and voltage variation has no distinct relationship with

the separation at UEP. On the contrary, the (cutset) control synchronizes

generators at first swing based on the recognition of partly stable regions

that are unique to every separation at UEP. The result of selecting a wrong

K2 leading to the wrong synchronization of generators at first swing is

shown in Figure 6.24. It is shown that the use of K2=10 results in the control

Page 224: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

197

switching (i.e. U=1) around 1.05s (Figure 6.24b) which leads to the

separation at Central-Left area (Figure 6.24a).

The second weakness of (mode) control is its generally poor damping

performance as a result of the use of voltage feedback signal )(2 iref VVK −

in the Umode control loop. The poor damping performance of (mode) control

is shown in Figure 6.25a whereas the result of (cutset) controls is shown in

Figure 6.25b. From Figure 6.25, it is understandable that (mode) control

achieves good first swing by compromising the damping performance.

Figure 6.24: Wrong selection of K2 in the voltage error control loop leads to

the separation at central-Left areas (dotted). Line trips at 199ms.

(a) Separation at the Central-Left area (dotted).

(b) Wrong selection of K2=10 for the control of SVC at bus 18 leads to the

separation at Central-Left area. The (mode) control is used.

(c) No change in K2 for the control of SVC at bus 13.

0 1 2 3 4 5 6

0

2

4

0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8-1

0

1

0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8-1

0

1

Time (sec.)

SVC control at bus 13, K2=15

SVC control at bus 18, K2=10

SVC control at bus 18, K2=5

δ 12coa- δ 56coa δ 12coa- δ 34coa

Page 225: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

198

Figure 6.25: A comparison between the damping performance of (mode)

and (cutset) controls. Line tripped at 199ms.

(a) Damping performance of (mode) control.

(b) Damping performance of (cutset) control.

6.8. Implementation issues

There are several issues which can influence the control implementation and

this section is mainly to elaborate these practical considerations such as

measurement noises, device response time, delayed data transmission, GPS

jitter and quantity of cutsets. This set of errors considered is specific to the

implementation of this type of cutest control.

6.8.1. Response Time of SVC and Time delay in Data

Transmission

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10-2

0

2

4

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10-2

-10123

Time (sec.)

SVCs are controlledusing (mode) control

SVCs are controlledusing (cutset) control

Page 226: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

199

The cutset energy-based control and energy-based control proposed in this

chapter uses remote measurements of machine angle δ and rate of change

of machine angle δ& in COA frame. The effect or control from time delay

experienced in data transmission and response time of control devices are

discussed in this subsection using the six-machine 21-bus power system as

an example.

For the six-machine 21-bus power system as shown in Figure 6.18, the

control of the SVCs installed at bus 18 has high influence on the inter-area

oscillations associated with the interaction between Central and Left areas

(i.e. Central-Left ). The control of SVC at bus 13 influences the interaction

between Central and Right areas (i.e. Central-Right). The frequencies of

Central-Left and Central-Right oscillations are approximately in the range

of 1.5 to 1.8 Hz as obtained from eigenvalue analysis. As the remote

measurements of δ and δ& in COA frame are based on Global positioning

System (GPS) uses ground based communication, the expected time delay

in the fibre optic network is less than 10ms considering an effective data

transmission rate of 2x108 m/sec. and maximum distance of 2000km. This

time delay is considerably small relatively to the control of low frequency

oscillations (1.5 Hz to 1.8 Hz) where an approximately 10ms delayed in

critical switching will not significantly deteriorate the controlled responses

in the power system.

The response time of power electronics based control devices such as SVC

Page 227: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

200

is approximately 20ms for large changes and 40ms for small changes. For

the control of power system at critical first swing, large changes in δ and δ&

are expected and the SVC response is 20ms. Hence, simulating a delay of

30ms gives rise to a 2.5 percent changes in the critical clearing time.

6.8.2. GPS Jitter

The commercial use of GPS receiver often experiences time pulse jitter [23]

of less than 1 nanosecond on data measurements. In this control application,

the effect of 1ns GPS jitter results in a negligible phase shift of 0.018x10-3

degrees in the measured data. This inaccuracy due to phase shift does not

influence the control performance significantly.

6.8.3. Measurement Noise

In the measurement of field data, measurement noise is a common issue. For

the GPS based measurement unit, a high sampling rate of typically 10 KHz

minimizes the measurement noises presence in the analogue signal resulting

in a low inaccuracy of ± 0.01 degrees in phase measurement. During

transient, relatively low measurement noise is expected and with the phase

measurement in the order of 80 degrees, a ± 0.012 percents inaccuracy due

to noise does not affect the control performance significantly.

Page 228: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

201

As the cutset energy-based control uses saturation function instead of the

bang-bang switching, as a result it is less sensitive to measurement noise. It

is understandable by considering the bang-bang function that even when

low noise is presents in the data measurements near switching, it can cause

control chattering whereas a saturation function is relatively insensitive to

low noise measurement.

6.8.4. Multidimensional Issue of Cutsets

The Energy Decomposition is to characterize total energy into energy

components that are likely to cause particular separations in a power system.

We have shown by considering all the possible cutsets that the sum of cutset

energy components equals to total energy and the decomposition scaling

coefficient for total kinetic energy, total energy stored in transmission lines

and total shaft energy (i.e. Ω, τ and λ) can be evaluated respectively from

(6.17), (6.20) and (6.24). Applying this Energy Decomposition in the cutset

energy control, it is only required to consider the cutset energy components

that are likely to cause separations in a power system, which associate with

the feasible cutsets. The following section elaborates on the construction of

feasible cutsets.

Considering a 10 machine 39-bus New England system as shown in Figure

6.24, the number of possible cutsets obtained is µ=1024 using the equation

(6.12). The decomposition scaling coefficients (i.e. Ω, τ and λ ) that are

Page 229: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

202

evaluated to be Ω =18432, τ =512 and λ =9216 are used in the computation

of cutset energy associated with the list of feasible cutsets. Examining

Figure 6.24, 33 cutsets are defined feasible as shown below using the

notation developed in (6.1):

)36,35,33,34,32,31,39,37,30/ 38()38,35,33,34,32,31,39,37,30/ 36()38,36,33,34,32,31,39,37,30/ 35()38,36,35,34,32,31,39,37,30/ 33()38,36,35,33,32,31,39,37,30/ 34()38,36,35,33,34,31,39,37,30/ 32()38,36,35,33,34,32,39,37,30/ 31()38,36,35,33,34,32,31,37,30/ 39()38,36,35,33,34,32,31,39,30/ 37()38,36,35,33,34,32,31,39,37/ 30(

)36,35,33,34,32,31,39,30 38,37()35,33,34,32,31,39,37,30 38,36()38,33,34,32,31,39,37,30 36,35()38,36,35,32,31,39,37,30 33,34()38,36,35,33,34,39,37,30 32,31()38,36,35,33,34,32,37,30 31,39()38,36,35,33,34,32,31,37 39,30()38,36,35,33,34,32,31,39 37,30(

),35,33,34,32,31,39,30 37,38,36(),33,34,32,31,39,37,30 38,36,35(

)38,36,35,33,34,37,30 32,31,39()38,36,35,33,34,32,37 31,39,30()38,36,35,33,34,32,37 31,39,30()38,36,35,33,34,32,31 39,37,30(

Page 230: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

203

),33,34,32,31,39,30 37,38,36,35()38,32,31,39,37,30 36,35,33,34()38,36,31,39,37,30 35,33,34,32()38,36,35,39,37,30 33,34,32,31()38,36,35,33,34,37 32,31,39,30()38,36,35,33,34,32 31,39,37,30(

)38,31,39,37,30 36,35,33,34,32()38,36,39,37,30 35,33,34,32,31()38,36,35,37,30 33,34,32,31,39()38,36,35,33,34 32,31,39,37,30(

where 30 to 38 are generators’ indices. It is obvious from observing Figure

6.24 that remaining cutsets such as )3,35,36,3830,37,39,3 / 31,32,34( are

not feasible cutsets that can give rise to a power system separation in the

form of two coherent groups of generators. Based on these 33 feasible

cutsets, 33 cutset energy componenets are evaluated in the control algorithm

to compare against 66 (i.e. 2x33) critical cutset energies evaluated at the 66

numbers of UEPs. Using the Davidon-Fletcher-Powell method, the 66

numbers of UEPs are searched from initial guesses obtained from equation

(6.25).

Page 231: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

204

Figure 6.24: Ten-machine 39-bus New England system.

6.8.5. Summary of Implementation Issues

The inaccuracy in remote measurement is caused by the GPS jitter giving

rides to a phase shift of 0.018x103 degrees and measurement noise that gives

rise to a ±0.01 degrees. These errors in measurement do not have severe

influence on the implemented control. In particular, when the unexpected

phase shifts introduced are negligibly small and the use of saturation

function avoids instance switching between the ±1 limits.

G30

39

1

2

25

37

29

17

26

9

3

38

16

5

4

18

27

28

3624

35

22

21

20

34

23

19

33

10

11

13

14

15

8 31

126

32

7

G

GG

G

G G G GG

Page 232: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

205

The response time of devices and delayed data transmission have some

impacts on the control performance. Comparing between the ideal (cutset)

control and practical (cutset) control subject to a 30ms delay, the critical

clearing time obtained from the practical (cutset) control is reduced by 2.5

%. In general, these undesirable results can be reduced by increasing the

feedback gain of the control loop.

In Energy Decomposition, the concern over the number of possible cutsets

obtained from a relatively large power system such as a Ten-machine 39-

bus meshed system that results in 1024 possible cutsets can be reduced

significantly. The approach is to consider only the feasible cutsets that are

likely to cause a power system separation in the form of two coherent

groups of generators.

Although these issues of feasibility and performance of control may give

rise to some difficulties in implementation, their effects are generally minor

and are easily overcome. Hence, the cutset energy control can be

implemented for the benefit of a realistic power system.

Page 233: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

206

6.9. Conclusion

In the case study 1, the classical three-machine 9-bus power system is used.

It is shown that the energy based control SV is capable of damping the

system oscillations fairly well however it causes the system trajectory to

hover near the UEPs at the boundary of the region of attraction. This

hovering behavior can lead to a system separation in the PS region of the

UEPs as explained in the earlier chapter pertaining to PS region.

As the decomposed energy (i.e. cutset energy) is able to predict at which

cutset the power system will separate, the cutset energy-based control is

thus designed with the control strategy that aimed at separations, which are

likely to occur. This has inevitably equipped the control with the ability to

introduce phase shifts near a UEP’s PS region when the system trajectory is

critical of separating. This feature has maintained high control values at

critical instances, which is particularly important for the control of a multi-

machine power system.

Although the energy evaluated at unstable local minima is not critical

energy, it is important to note that under the different power dispatches and

loading at weak links, a UEP can become a ULM and vice versa. Hence, all

unstable operating points shall be considered in the design of a cutset based

energy control.

Page 234: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

207

The case study 2 focuses on the synchronization of generators and damping

of subsequent oscillations. The quantification of the extended transient

stability limits using different controls as seen in Figure 6.23 does not

include the short-circuit rating study on the EHV lines in observing whether

factors such as the variations of short-circuit current and weather conditions

would result in the short-circuit rating or thermal rating of lines being

exceeded. The aim of this quantification is to demonstrate the possibility of

extending the transient stability limits and improving the network transfer

capacity limits using a (cutset) control. The result of this chapter is to be

seen as a contribution to future discussions amongst engineers in the areas

of relay protection, thermal rating of overhead lines and transient stability

analysis.

It is found that the control performance of both energy-based control design

in [6] and the proposed cutset-based energy control are insensitive to an

energy function approximation using classical model while transient

stability study is based on detailed machine models. Assuming a linear

relation between the investments in SVC and transfer capacity, investments

that are spent in the extra SVC capacity to cater for a higher transfer

capacity can be saved using the proposed cutset energy-based (cutset)

control. By including cutset information in energy-based control design,

these controls will yield high system survival, maximize control resources

and improve network transfer capacity.

Page 235: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

208

This chapter develops a method of decomposing energy into key separation

energy (or cutset energy) and its application in control design has been

demonstrated. The cutset energy based control (cutset) is capable of

retaining system synchronism to sustain a high system survival while

damping the subsequent oscillations satisfactorily. In spite of the

longitudinal power system chosen in the case study, the proposed total

energy decomposition and cutset energy based control are generally suitable

for any configurations in power system layout. As such it is also applicable

in the control of a meshed power system.

The main outcome of this work is the control of FACT devices that

maximizes the probability of retaining synchronism after disturbances as

well as providing a well coordinated multi-machine damping. This is

demonstrated using a simple system containing full order generator models.

This example showed at least a 120 % improvement in control effectiveness

when compared to a conventional design.

Page 236: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

209

6.10. References

[1] M. A. Pai, Energy Function Analysis For Power System Stability: Kluwer Academic Publishers, 1989.

[2] A. R. Bergen and D. J. Hill, "A structure Preserving Model For Power System Stability Analysis," IEEE Transactions on Power Apparatus and Systems, vol. PAS-100, No. 1, pp. 25-35, January 1981.

[3] A. A. Fouad and V. Vittal, "The Transient Energy Function Method," International Journal of Electrical Power and Energy Systems, vol. 10, No. 4, pp. 233-246, October 1988.

[4] A. A. Fouad, V. Vittal, and T. K. Oh, "Critical Energy For Direct Transient Stability Assessment of A Multimachine Power System," IEEE Transactions on Power Apparatus and Systems, vol. PAS-103, No. 8, pp. 2199-2206, August 1984.

[5] G. Ledwich, J. Fernandez-Vargas, and X. Yu, "Switching Control of Multi-machine Power Systems," IEEE / KTH Stockholm Power Tech Conference, Stockholm, Sweden, pp. 138-142, June 1995.

[6] E. Palmer and G. Ledwich, "Switching control for power systems with line lossess," IEE Proceedings- Generation, Transmission, Distributions, vol. 146, No.5, pp. 435-440, September 1999.

[7] B. D. Bunday, Basic optimisation methods: Edward Arnold (Publisher) Ltd, 1984.

[8] M. A. Pai, Power System Stability - Analysis by the Direct Method of Lyapunov, vol. 3: North-Holland Publishing Company, 1981.

[9] C.-W. Liu and J. S. Thorp, "A novel method to compute the closest unstable equilibrium point for the transient stability region estimate in power systems," IEEE Transactions on circuits and Systems-I: Fundamental Theory And Applications, vol. 44, No. 7, pp. 630-635, July 1997.

[10] T. W. Chan, G. Ledwich, and E. W. Palmer, "Is velocity feedback always best for machine stability control ?," Aupec 2002, Melbourne, Australia, October 2002. (Available at http://www.itee.uq.edu.au/~aupec/aupec02/Final-Papers/T-W-Chan1-808.pdf).

[11] P. M. Anderson and A. A. Fouad, Power System Control and Stability: IEEE Press, 1994.

[12] G. Ledwich and E. Palmer, "Energy Function For Power Systems with Transmission Losses," IEEE Transactions on Power Systems, vol. 12, No. 2, pp. 785-790, May 1997.

[13] T. W. Chan and G. Ledwich, "Multi-mode damping using single HVDC link," Aupec 2001, Perth, Australia, pp. 483-488, September 2001.

Page 237: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

210

[14] H. D. Chiang, C.-C. Chu, and G. Cauley, "Direct Stability Analysis of Electric Power Systems Using Energy Functions: Theory, Applications, and Perspective," Proceedings of the IEEE, vol. 83, No. 11, pp. 1497-1528, November 1995.

[15] J. S. Thorp and S. A. Naqavi, "Load Flow Fractals," 28th Conference on Decision and Control, Tampa, Florida, U.S.A 1989.

[16] A. A. Fouad and S. E. Stanton, "Transient Stability of A Multi-Machine Power System. Part II: Critical Transient Energy," IEEE Transactions on Power Apparatus and Systems, vol. PAS-100, No. 7, pp. 3417-3424, July 1981.

[17] T. Athay, R. Podmore, and S. Virmani, "A practical method for the direct analysis of transient stability," IEEE Transactions on Power Apparatus and Systems, vol. PAS-98, No. 2, pp. 573-584, March/April 1979.

[18] C. L. Gupta and A. H. El-Abiad, "Determination of the closest unstable equilibrium state for Liapunov methods in transient stability studies," IEEE Transactions on Power Apparatus and Systems, vol. PAS-95, No. 5, pp. pp. 1699-1712, September/ October 1976.

[19] E. W. Palmer, "Multi-Mode Damping of Power System Oscillations," PhD thesis in Electrical and Computer Engineering The University of Newcastle, 1998, pp. 196.

[20] P. Kundur, Power System Stability and Control: McGraw-Hill, Inc, 1994.

[21] S. Kim and Y. Park, "On-line Fundamental Frequency Tracking Method For Harmonic Signal and Application to ANC," Journal of Sound and Vibration, vol. 241, N0. 4, pp. 681-691, 2001.

[22] E. W. Palmer and G. Ledwich, "Optimal Placement of Angle Transducers In Power Systems," IEEE Transactions on Power Systems, vol. 11, No. 12, pp. 788-793, May 1996.

[23] T. N. Osterdock, "Using A New GPS Frequency Reference In Frequency Calibration Operations," 47th IEEE International Frequency Control Symposium, Salt Lake City, UT, USA, pp. 33-39, February-April 1993.

Page 238: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

211

Chapter 7.

Conclusion and Recommendations

7.1. Conclusion

It is mentioned in the thesis that modern power systems are frequently

formed by interconnecting the power systems of various regions in spite of

the fact that these interconnecting practices may give rise to complicated

electromechanical dynamics amongst the generators of a large

interconnected power system. From the small signal analysis perspective,

the provision of synchronizing and damping torques through the excitation

and power system stabilizer (PSS) control loops are crucial in the

improvement of transient stability in the power system. However, it is clear

that using small signal analysis to predict the stability of a power system is

limited to operating conditions subject to small disturbances. The objective

of this thesis is to investigate whether the synchronization of generators and

damping of oscillations can be maximized via a non-linear approach to

Page 239: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

212

extend fully the transient stability of power system and improve the network

transfer capacity. The approach taken in the analyses of generators

interaction and development of control methodology was based on

Lyapunov energy function.

The Lyapunov stability criteria and Lyapunov energy function have been

introduced in this thesis. It is explained that energy function predicts the

transient stability of power systems regardless of the size of disturbance as

long as the Lyapunov function is positive definite when it is bounded within

some angle limits, its derivative is negative definite and system trajectory at

fault clearance lies inside the region of attraction.

From the literature review on the control of thyristor controlled series

compensation (TCSC), it has been found that energy control based on

Lyapunov’s stability criteria is capable of reducing the disturbance energy

that is injected into accelerating the rotor of generators during a fault period.

It is learnt from this literature review that the design of a control law based

on the Lyapunov’s stability criteria guarantees a non-divergent trajectory

inside a region of attraction and the damping of n modes requires n numbers

of controllers.

The literature review on the control of DC link has suggested that the

common problems encountered in the control of DC link in power systems

are mainly associated with the control mode interactions and voltage

Page 240: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

213

variations at inverter stations. In particular, the voltage variations at the

inverter are usually associated with the limitations of the gamma control.

During transient period, current control of inverter is being used to reduce

these voltage fluctuations. The control mode interactions are largely excited

by the limitations of the controls at the rectifier and inverter. This problem

can be overcome using the respective power modulation control and voltage

modulation control at the rectifier and inverter stations. The literature

review on the control of DC link has highlighted that the choice of feedback

signal is largely limited by the strength of the system (or size) at the inverter

side. From this literature review, it is found that adequate understanding of

the dynamics of control interactions and impact of reactive power

‘consumption’ of converters are essential in the development of an effective

control methodology. In addition, it is important to consider the strengths of

weak power system at its inverter side in a control design.

The literature review on wide area control, comparing the effectiveness of

control strategy in centralized and decentralized controls, has emphasized

the importance of using wide area information (or remote measurements) as

the control feedback signals. The performance of the decentralized control

of PSS is found to be satisfactory when remote measurements are being

used as feedback signals. This literature review has indicated that it is likely

for a control to influence distant modes or multiple modes if wide area

information is being utilized in control design.

Page 241: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

214

As transient stability limits are associated with the separation of power

system into two coherent groups of generators, it is important to understand

the literature in the area of Controlling Unstable Equilibrium Point (UEP) to

gain an understanding of the different interpretations of these unique

descriptors of power system separations. It is evident that Controlling UEP

depends on the characteristic of respective faults. The literature review on

the methods of stability assessment has shown that the comparison between

the total energy evaluated at post-fault and critical energy evaluated at a

Controlling UEP has helped to determine if a power system is stable at post-

fault. In the prediction of power system stability, if the energy evaluated at a

UEP is the lowest amongst a set of credible UEPs and it is not a critical

energy, then it is not a Controlling UEP. It has appeared from these

literature reviews that a desirable control design should not be based on a

Controlling UEP which is fault-dependent instead it should be based on any

credible UEPs.

The above-mentioned research objective and literature reviews have

motivated the following developments of the control methodology that is

effective in the synchronization of generators and damping of oscillations in

power systems.

In a hypothetical case, an energy function control based on Lyapunov’s

stability criteria has been applied to the control of two independently

operated AC power systems which is connected by a DC link. This two-area

Page 242: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

215

DC link power system has shown that energy from each of these areas can

be summed to represent the energy of one large power system. When this

total energy is converging under the influence of energy function control,

both these independent AC power systems will converge to their stable

equilibrium operating points. Using bang-bang control, the common

problem of control chattering near a stable equilibrium operating point

(SEP) has been encountered and characterized as a high gain feedback

control problem. The Root Locus analysis has shown that the bang-bang

control can be described as a velocity feedback control with an infinite gain.

The use of finite gain switching near the SEP will provide the necessary

system damping that is required for the convergence of system trajectory. A

saturation function has been found to be suitable in satisfying these

requirements especially when both the benefits of finite-time damping

introduced by the bang-bang control and exponential damping introduced by

the use of finite gain in switching must be reaped.

Using the same hypothetical case of a four-machine two-area DC linked

power system where one area is weaker than the other, it is highlighted that

the survival of a large power system from severe faults is commonly

determined by the transient stability limits of its weaker area. Hence, it is

important that the determining factors of strong and weak areas are to be

considered in control design using the form of weighted energy control. The

proximity-to-critical energy approach is found to be capable of directing

Page 243: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

216

most of the control efforts to a weak area when it is most needed during the

crucial instances.

While it is possible to subject a power system to larger disturbances by

weighing the energy of its weak area to a larger extent, it has given rise to

the problem of control chattering near a UEP. Using a Single-Machine-

Infinite-Bus system (SMIB) as an example, the energy of the power system

in phase portrait has been used as an analysis tool to provide an insight to

the cause of this control problem near a UEP. It has been found that the

repetitive switching inside a partly stable region has resulted in the control

chattering near a UEP with machine angles hovering at maximum. In order

to overcome this undesirable switching, phase shift is being introduced via

an angle look-ahead control.

In a multi-machine power system, energy function control has limits in fully

synchronizing the generators and keeping the different types of angle

separations as small as possible in a power system since this control design

is based on total energy. From this total energy, it has become difficult to

determine at which points in time a power system separation has occurred.

This problem has been overcome by decomposing total energy into cutset

energy that is associated with the different types of separations. Using the

proximity to critical cutset energy and partly stable region as the major

control strategy, the weighting between the cutset dependent terms and

energy function dependent terms has given rise to a cutset energy control.

Page 244: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

217

This cutset energy control is capable of targeting control efforts when a

power system is close to a separation. It has shown that this control has the

ability to fully extend the transient stability limits of the power system thus

improving the transfer capacity of electrical transmission network

significantly.

The main outcome of this research is the control of FACTs that maximizes

the probability of retaining synchronism after disturbances as well as

providing a well coordinated multi-machine damping. This has been

demonstrated using a classical three-machine 9-bus power system and a

detailed six-machine 21-bus power system. One of the major strengths of

cutset energy control lies in its ability to recognize the threat of weak links

in power system and synchronize generators by targeting the control efforts

at these weak links. In general, improvement in the synchronization

amongst generators remains the most important aspect in improving the

survival of power system which in turn improves the network transfer

capacity through improvement on the transient stability limits of power

system.

7.2. Recommendations For Future Works

The major recommendations of this research mentioned in the thesis are as

follows:

Page 245: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

218

1) One of the major limitations in the control algorithm is the recognition

of feasible cutsets for large power systems. As it is understood from the

Energy Decomposition in Chapter 6 that although possible cutsets are

used in the Energy Decomposition to derive cutset energy, the control

strategy only needs to evaluate the proximity-to-separation

circumstances for all feasible cutsets. The feasible cutsets refers to the

separation of a power system into two coherent groups of generators.

In a large longitudinal power systems which may consist of hundreds of

generators and thousands of transmission lines, the advantages of using

a list of feasible cutsets as the basis for the evaluation of the proximity-

to-separation circumstances in the power system are the reduced burden

in the proximity-to-separation evaluation. This is understandable when

we consider a large longitudinal power system and found that the lists

of feasible cutsets is often smaller than that of the possible cutsets.

It is anticipated that the construction of an incident matrix [1, page 64]

based on Graph Theory [2] may help in the finding of feasible cutsets

of a large power system. The concept of identifying feasible cutsets is

based on the numbers of ways a power system could break into two

coherent groups of generators. One possible way of constructing an

incident matrix disregarding the power flow for the 5-bus network [1,

page 63-64] as shown in Figure 7.1 is

Page 246: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

219

000010000100010000100010110100000011000100001111

654321

87654321

where all columns are lines indices and all rows are nodes reference.

This figure is not available online. Please consult the hardcopy thesis

available at the QUT Library.

Figure 7.1: 5 Bus network extracted from [1].

2) As we have learnt from the control methodology in this thesis that the

control is capable of yielding and managing the pure damping and

synchronizing torque components in power systems via the network

connected devices such as SVC, it is most desirable to extend this

concept to the excitation control as an additional mean of synchronizing

generators and controlling the voltage profile of power system through

generators.

Thus far we have considered the case where a change of control

variable (SVC value) results in instantaneous change of real power

Page 247: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

220

flow. One form of control, which is used in power system, is adjusting

the field of generator through an exciter. Because the change of voltage

applied to the exciter does not result in an immediate change to field

flux, we have a case where the power system doe not response

instantaneously to control variables. The issue that needs to be

researched is the development of a control process other than

maximizing V& at each instance of time. To give some directions to the

research that could be useful, let us consider the following steps in the

derivation of a control law using a SMIB case. The Lyapunov function

in the form of kinetic energy Vke in a power system is

221 δ&mVke =

where m is the machine inertial constant and δ& is the rate of change of

generator angle.

The time constant between a control input u state influences changes in

the generator terminal voltage E can be expressed crudely as

uTs

KEexc+

=

where Texc is the exciter time constant and K is the gain.

The derivative of kinetic energy keV& is

−=

=

xEVP

mV

m

keδδ

δδsin&

&&&&

Page 248: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

221

It is noted from the keV& equation that the controllable terms describing

the instantaneous changes in the network’s power flow, such as when

SVC switches between its limits, no longer exist. This is because the

changes in excitation control do not result in instantaneous changes in

the network’s power flow. Taking the second derivative of the kinetic

energy, we have

)(sincossin

)(sincossin

22uET

xV

xEV

xEV

uETx

Vx

EVx

EVV

exc

excke

+−++

=

+−++=

δδδδδ

δδδδδδ

&&

&&&&&&

Examining the keV&& equation, it appears that the control law could be

used to maximize the reduction in the second derivative of kinetic

energy instead of first derivative of Lyapunov function. This type of

control law based on the maximum reduction of keV&& does not guarantee

the asymptotic convergence of system trajectory towards a stable

equilibrium operating condition.

The above problem in the control of excitation based on cutset energy is

likely to be resolved when Model Predictive Control is considered.

Model Predictive Control is discussed in the following sections.

The receding horizon control strategy is also known as Model

Predictive Control (MPC). MPC generally solves an optimization

Page 249: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

222

problem based on a set of state measurement to find optimal control

values. Optimal control values are usually obtained by solving a

discrete-time optimal problem under a given horizon (or sampling

window) [3], with the first control value being applied to the control of

a process. The next control value is obtained by running an

optimization problem again and a new set of state measurements is

used. One key aspect of this recursive optimization approach is to

consider the minimization of a performance index such as

( )∫ += uRuxQxJ

where x is the state vector referenced to a stable operating condition, u

is a vector of control values, Q is a weighting matrix that emphasizes

the relative importance of states over the control effort u and R is a

weighting matrix for the control values (or control effort).

In control context, velocity feedback generally yields satisfying control

performance and the appropriate use of the state penalty term (xTQx) to

penalize the diversion of machine angular velocity in the control of

power system during a transient is advantageous and this type of

performance index [4] is

dtJ ft

o 2∫= ω

Another types of performance index based on mass scaled machine

angles error [5] was used to penalize the divergence of machine angles

and found satisfactory

Page 250: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

223

∫ ∑ −= To

icoaii dtMJ 2)( δδ

One advantage of the Model Predictive Control is the ability to handle

the constraints of a stable system under saturated control. MPC with

control constraints incorporates the practical aspect of an actuator in its

search routine to find optimal control values. In [6], the control

constraints were defined in an optimization problem using a different

type of performance index

∑ −==

m

iidiitu

yyminJ1

2**

)()(ˆ)( ττω

hiili utuu ≤≤ )(

where *diy is the ith output reference trajectory, *ˆ iy is the ith delay-free

controlled output, ω is the weightings set according to the relative

importance of controlled output, J is the minimized performance index

and u is the control effort bounded within an upper )( hiu and lower

)( liu value.

Judging from these brief discussions on MPC, it appears that as long as

the MPC’s receding horizon (or sampling window) is sufficiently

designed to include the major dynamics of voltage variations, the

control law derived from keV&& can be used in conjunction with the MPC

control to yield asymptotic convergence in the power system.

Page 251: Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control ...Proximity-to-Separation Based Energy Function Control Strategy for Power System Stability Teck-Wai Chan B.Eng (Hons.), MSc

224

7.3. References

[1] M. A. Pai, Energy Function Analysis For Power System Stability: Kluwer Academic Publishers, 1989.

[2] E. Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, 8th ed: Wiley, New York, 1999.

[3] M. Larsson, D. J. Hill, and G. Olsson, "Emergency voltage control using search and predictive control," Electrical Power and Energy Systems, vol. 24, pp. 121-130, 2002.

[4] H.-C. Chang and M.-H. Wang, "Neural Network-Based Self-Organizing Fuzzy Controller for Transient Stability of Multimachine Power Systems," IEEE Transactions on Energy Conversion, vol. 10, No. 2, pp. 339-347, June 1995.

[5] S. M. Rovnyak, C. W. Taylor, and J. S. Thorp, "Performance Index and Classifier Approaches to Real-Time, Discrete-Event Control," Control Engineering Practice, vol. 5, No. 1, pp. 91-99, 1997.

[6] H. M. Kanter, W. D. Seider, and M. Soroush, "Nonlinear Feedback Control of Stable Processes," American Control Conference, Arlington, VA, pp. 3624-3629, June 25-27 2001.